an employee owned company - cmtonline.com · r:\cmt\manuals\brochure\mirpt\msds\fall...

141
R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx An Employee Owned Company , Computer Management Technologies, Inc. 731 Gratiot Avenue Saginaw, Michigan 48602-2109 Phone: 989-791-4860 Fax: 989-791-4928 www.cmtonline.com

Upload: others

Post on 13-Jul-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx

An Employee Owned Company

, Computer Management Technologies, Inc. 731 Gratiot Avenue Saginaw, Michigan 48602-2109 Phone: 989-791-4860 Fax: 989-791-4928 www.cmtonline.com

Page 2: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx

Table of Contents

General Information........................................................................................................................................... 1

State Reporting Overview - SRSD & MSDS Main Menus ............................................................................... 2

CIMS Programs Set Up for State Reporting .................................................................................................... 3 SCH.310 – Course Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 3 GRD.201 – Grade Titles ................................................................................................................................ 5 ATT.650 – Post Summarized Absence History ............................................................................................ 5 GRD.601 – Set Student Date of Graduation ................................................................................................. 6 STU.801 – Run Year End Procedure to Promote Students ......................................................................... 7 STU.280 – Student Tag Definitions .............................................................................................................. 8 STU.107 – General Student Attributes ......................................................................................................... 9 STU.108 – Table Values for Student Attributes ............................................................................................ 9 Protecting the UIC Field ................................................................................................................................. 9 ACS.350 – Maintain Program Technical Definitions ................................................................................... 10 ACS.310 – Maintain Menu Item Definitions ................................................................................................ 11 STU.282 – Access to Restricted Tags ........................................................................................................ 12 STU.303 – Maintain Student Discipline Records ........................................................................................ 12 SCH.320 – Master Schedule/SH.320T ....................................................................................................... 14 STU.240 – Teacher Maintenance File ........................................................................................................ 14 MSD.940 – Update PIC Number .................................................................................................................. 15

SRSD99/MSDS99 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Codes ...................................................................... 16

SRSD98 – SRSD/CIMS Setup Programs ........................................................................................................ 16 SR.200 – Maintain Links to State School and District. ................................................................................ 16 SR.210 – Maintain Links to State Classes ................................................................................................... 17 SR.220 – Maintain Links to State Ethnic Codes .......................................................................................... 17 SR.230 – Maintain Links to State Exit Status Codes ................................................................................... 18 SR.250 – Maintain Links to Disposition Codes ............................................................................................ 19 SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates ................................................................................................. 20 SR.240 – Maintain Schools and Classes to Bypass for Reporting .............................................................. 20 SR.270 – Maintain Links from Resident LEA to Attribute Value .................................................................. 21 SR.272 – Maintain Links from Resident Status to Attribute Value ............................................................... 21 SR.274 – Maintain Links from Resident County to Attribute Value ............................................................. 22 SR.280 – Maintain District Definitions for SRSD ......................................................................................... 23 SR.283 – Maintain Links to State Nutritional Eligibility Codes ..................................................................... 24 SR.285 – Assign Nutritional Eligibility Code by Tag or Attribute .................................................................. 24 SR.400 – Clear Specified Attribute .............................................................................................................. 25 SR.920 – Set Student School Code/County/ISD/Operating ISD ................................................................. 25 SR.940 – Create Withdraw Records for Non-Returning Students ............................................................... 26 SR.410 – Create Withdrawal Record for Last Year ..................................................................................... 26 SR.420 – Update Ethnic Codes in SR301B ................................................................................................. 27 SR.430 – Set SRSD Count Date for SR301IM Records .............................................................................. 28 SR.963 – Update SR360WRK Files ............................................................................................................ 28 SR.964 – Create SR360WRK Files ............................................................................................................. 29 FIXSR.360 – Fix to Update WKYEAR & WKLOD for SR360WRK ............................................................... 29

SRSD01 - Programs for Maintaining SRSD Records ................................................................................... 30 SR.301B – Input Single Record Basic Information ................................................................................... 30 SR.301T1 – Input Title 1 Student Information ............................................................................................ 31 SR.301SE – Input Special Education Information ....................................................................................... 31 SR.301EI – Input Early Intervention Student Information .......................................................................... 32 SR.301EC – Input Early Childhood Student Information ............................................................................. 32 SR.301GT – Input Advanced & Accelerated Student Info ........................................................................... 32 SR.301BI – Input Bilingual/LEP Student Information ................................................................................. 33 SR.301ME – Input Migrant Education Information ....................................................................................... 33 SR.301MC – Input Migrant Curriculum Information ..................................................................................... 34 SR.301AE – Input Adult Education Information .......................................................................................... 35 SR.301II – Input Immigrant Information .................................................................................................... 35 SR.301EX – Expulsion Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 36 SR.360 – Maintain SRSD Dropped Student Data (SR360WRK) ........................................................... 38 SR.301RF – Input Special Ed Referral Information ..................................................................................... 39

SR.301ES – Maintain Early Childhood Special Ed Assessment ................................................................. 41 SR.301AT - Input SRSD At-Risk Student Information ................................................................................ 42

Page 3: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx

Table of Contents (cont’d)

SRSD01 - Programs for Maintaining SRSD Records (cont’d)

EN.100 – Change Enrollment History ..................................................................................................... 43 EN.100R – Restricted Change Enrollment History ................................................................................... 43

MSDS02 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Records .................................................................................. 44 SR.301B – Input Single Record Basic Information ................................................................................... 44 SR.301EC – Input Early Childhood Information .......................................................................................... 45 SR.301ES – Maintain Early Childhood Special Ed Assessment ................................................................. 46 SR.301MC – Input Migrant Curriculum Information ..................................................................................... 47 SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs - Students Not in CIMS ........................................................................ 48 MSD.310 – Input Early Childhood Information (non-CIMS students) ........................................................ 51 MSD.320 – Input Migrant Curriculum Information (non-CIMS students) ................................................... 52

SRSD02 – Programs for Importing Records into SRSD .............................................................................. 53 SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs-Students Not in CIMS (Refer to this section within MSDS02 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Records) SR.510 – Import SRSD Files into CIMS Files .............................................................................................. 53 SR.721 (SR.721N-Next Year) – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML File for V2 MSDS ............................................ 56 SR.730 – Import 132 Char UIC File From MSDS>SR301U ........................................................................ 58 SR.741 – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML V2 MSDS - SR301IM ......................................................................... 59 SR.750 – Import 132 Char UIC File From MSDS>SR301IM ....................................................................... 61 SR.520 – Create CIMS Student Records from SRSD ................................................................................. 62

SRSD03 – Programs for Creating State Download File ............................................................................... 63 SR.580 – Clear Files Before Starting New Submission ............................................................................... 63 SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD ........................................................................................... 63 SR.550 – Merge CIMS/Imported Records to Build Download File .............................................................. 65 SR.301 – Maintain ALL SRSD Information .................................................................................................. 66 SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission .......................................................................................... 69 SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs and Remove Data ................................................................. 70

MSDS03 – Programs to Create MSDS State Download Files ...................................................................... 71 MSD.200 – Maintain Districts to Include in MSDS Reporting ...................................................................... 71 MSD.250 – Maintain Links to Completion Status ........................................................................................ 72 MSD.330 - Maintain Course Extension Info for TSDL ................................................................................. 73 MSD.620 – Build TSDL Download File ....................................................................................................... 74 MSD.450 – Maintain All TSDL Information .................................................................................................. 78 MSD.540 – Report of Teachers with PIC .................................................................................................... 79 MSD.550 – Detail/Summary List of Students from TSDL ............................................................................ 79 MSD.555 – Detail/Summary List of Teachers from TSDL ........................................................................... 80 MSD.560 – Teachers Courses Not in the TSDL Collection ......................................................................... 80 MSD.570 – Report of Teacher Endorsements ............................................................................................ 81 MSD.600 – Build MSDS Files for the State ................................................................................................. 81 MSD.600 – General Collection (Fall, Spring, End-of-Year) ......................................................................... 83 MSD.600 – Student Record Maintenance (SRM) ....................................................................................... 84 MSD.600 – SRM End-of-Summer Snapshot ............................................................................................... 87 MSD.600 – TSDL Submission ..................................................................................................................... 87 MSD.600 – Early Childhood Submission .................................................................................................... 88 SR.721 (SR.721N) - Create MSDS UIC or Early Roster File ....................................................................... 90 SR.741 – Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR.301IM ......................................................................... 92 SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates ................................................................................................. 95 SR.280 – Maintain District Definitions for SRSD ......................................................................................... 96 SR.290 – Remove Stu's From Programs & Remove Data .......................................................................... 97 SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD ........................................................................................... 98 SR.550 – Merge CIMS/Imported Records to Build Download File .............................................................. 99

SRSD04 – SRSD Data Reports ..................................................................................................................... 100 SR.620 – Print SRSD Summary Report .................................................................................................... 100 SR.659 – Modifications to SRSD Report Writer Items ............................................................................... 101 SR.660 – SRSD Report Writer Formats .................................................................................................... 102 SR.630 – Select and Print Your Own SRSD Report .................................................................................. 103 SR.650 – List Dropped Students from Current & Last Yr .......................................................................... 104 SR.655 – Print Alpha List of Enrolled Students ......................................................................................... 105 SR.670 – SRSD Count Day Attendance Report ........................................................................................ 106 ST.2260 – General Report Writer Formats ................................................................................................. 108

Page 4: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx

Table of Contents (cont’d)

SRSD04 – SRSD Data Reports (cont’d)

ST.5530 – Select and Print Your Own Report ............................................................................................. 108 ST.525 – Print One Per Family Labels by Zip Code ................................................................................. 109 SR.625 – Print SRSD FTE/Headcount Table Report ................................................................................ 110 SR.635 – Print CIMS FTE and Head Count Table Report ......................................................................... 111 SR.690 – Class Level/Register Mismatch Report ...................................................................................... 112 AT.530 – Custom Print Attendance Registers ........................................................................................... 113 SR.658 – Print Students Expected in Submission Reports ....................................................................... 114 MSD.510 – CA60 Tracking Audit Report ................................................................................................... 115

Appendix A – Process for Creating Student Record Maintenance File (End of Summer Snapshot) ... 116 How to Enter Summer Graduates or Summer Withdrawals ............................................. 116 Appendix B – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection - Fall File ................................................ 117 Appendix C – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection - Spring File ........................................... 118 Appendix D – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection - End-of-Year File .................................. 119 Appendix E – Process for Creating TSDL Collection File (work in progress) ........................................ 120 Appendix F – Methods to Download Your MSDS Files ............................................................................. 121 Appendix G – Importing MICIS File as .xml ................................................................................................ 129 Appendix H – Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) ........................................................... 130 Appendix I – MSDS File Layouts (work in progress) ............................................................................... 137

Page 5: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1

General Information Forward This user guide was written to assist in using the MSDS (Michigan Student Data System) Software in development by the State of Michigan. It includes standard installation instructions and defines the programs and procedures involved in maintaining student records. Due to the many varied needs of users, this manual does not provide custom installation instructions. Please check for custom installation instructions received with the shipment of the software. Also, it is important to note that this manual is to be used in conjunction with the instructions from CEPI for the MSDS. This manual is to assist the user with the use of our software, not to interpret the requirements of the State. Hardware Requirements The required hardware components for running the MSDS software consist of the following:

System i/AS400 running V5R2M0 or higher

Client Access or TCP/IP on the PC (if transferring files between System i/AS400 & PC) Limitation of Liability Computer Management Technologies, Inc. provides this publication “AS IS” without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Some states do not allow a disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not be applicable to you. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, CMT assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein. Changes are periodically made to the information; and these changes are incorporated in new editions of the manual. Computer Management Technologies, Inc. may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) or program(s) described in this manual at any time. Characters, products and companies are fictitious, and any similarity to actual persons, business establishments or events is purely coincidental. In no event will Computer Management Technologies, Inc. or its developers be liable to you for any incidental, consequential, or indirect damages (including damages for loss of profits, interruption, loss of information, and the like) arising out of the use or inability to use this program even if Computer Management Technologies, Inc. or any authorized Computer Management Technologies, Inc. representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Computer Management Technologies, Inc.’s liability to you for actual damages for any cause whatsoever, and regardless of the form of action, will be limited to the greater of $500 or the money paid for this program. Any Questions? If you have any questions regarding this manual or the use of this program, please call Computer Management Technologies, Inc. at (989) 791-4860. Thank you for your support of Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

Page 6: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 2

State Reporting Overview – SRSD & MSDS Main Menus This manual contains information on programs that were originally written for SRSD State Reporting as well as MSDS State Reporting changes that were implemented in the Fall of 2011. The two methodologies are now combined to a degree and you will see the MSDS and SRSD acronyms used interchangeably. Not all programs listed in the Table of Contents are required to produce a final upload file. Many are used infrequently or intended as “fix” programs for various programs that arise. It is suggested you follow the Appendices in the back of the manual for the particular submission you are filing with the State, as procedures may be different for each. If you encounter issues or questions regarding any programs or procedures, you may contact CMT via email at [email protected] or call us directly. Below are samples of both the SRSD and MSDS menus. You may customize these as you wish through ACS.330 - Menu Definitions, but keep in mind that if the menus are reloaded on your system, you may lose any customization.

SRSD – Main Menu

MENU SRSD : MICHIGAN SINGLE RECORD STUDENT DATABASE

1. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING SRSD RECORDS.....CMT SRSD01 MENU

2. PROGRAMS FOR IMPORTING RECORDS INTO SRSD..CMT SRSD02 MENU

3. PROGRAMS FOR CREATING STATE DOWNLOAD FILE.CMT SRSD03 MENU

4. MSDS/SRSD DATA REPORTS....................CMT SRSD04 MENU

5. SRSD/CIMS SETUP PROGRAMS..................CMT SRSD98 MENU

6. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING MSDS/SRSD CODES..CMT SRSD99 MENU

7. STUDENT COUNT REPORTING (AKA FOURTH FRIDAY) . FFRPT MENU

8. MEAP REPORTING AND MAINTENANCE MENU . . . . . MEAP MENU

9. GRAD REQ & DROPOUT REVIEW MENU . . . . . . . SRSDGR MENU

10. http://www.cmtonline.com . . . . . . . . . . CMTWEBPAGE

MSDS – Main Menu

MENU MSDS : MICHIGAN STUDENT DATA SYSTEM

1. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING MSDS RECORDS.....CMT MSDS02 MENU

2. PROGRAMS TO CREATE MSDS STATE DOWNLOAD FILE.. MSDS03 MENU

3. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING MSDS/SRSD CODES..CMT SRSD99 MENU

4. MSDS/SRSD DATA REPORTS....................CMT SRSD04 MENU

5. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING INCIDENT IDS . . . . MSDS05 MENU

6. PROGRAMS FOR MAINTAINING MSDS CODES . . . . . MSDS99 MENU

Page 7: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 3

CIMS Programs Set Up for State Reporting

SCH.310 – Course Definitions The second screen of the SCH.310 Course Definition file contains a number of fields to assist in the tracking of this data, including a number of new fields to track State graduation requirements that will affect the incoming classes. Please refer to CMT’s Graduation Requirements manual for specific information regarding these fields. It also contains fields to assist in tracking Advanced and Accelerated. When these fields are completed in SCH.310 and the student has the course scheduled in the course request file, they will be submitted to the State as an Advanced and Accelerated student. SMS Course Definition Ref: SCH.310 .12

Course ENG1 Title FR ENG SM1 District ZPS School TST

Credit for current period GPA: .500 Legend Code: B

Weighting factor (reports only): ______ Exclude from Cum Credits? N

Purge Transcript @ Next Schl based on

Grades are: S Include in: Remove Course From Transcript? N

S = Symbol Honor Roll? Y Remove GPA from Transcript? N

N = Not Used GPA? Y Rmv District Credits From Trnscrpt? N

Level: 2

1 - Advanced

2 - Regular

3 - Essential

Applies to State Graduation Requirements? N On-Line Learning Hours: .00

Satisfies Graduation Requirement in ENG ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Satisfies State Grad Requirement in ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

SRSD - FIELDS

Course Enrollment #: 000

Advanced and Accelerated Program Model: 0

Advanced and Accelerated Special Program Options: 0 0 0

Mode: Lookup F3=Exit F12=Cancel

The Legend Code field is currently not a submitted field for State Reporting, but has been included in this program as a courtesy to our clients who are using it to categorize courses for transcripting purposes. When the Exclude from Cum Credits field is answered with ‘Y’, the course will be excluded from the Cumulative Grad Credits Earned. The Applies to State Graduation Requirements field if answered with ‘Y’, allows the client to use state grad requirements instead of the regular grad requirements. The On-Line Learning Hours field is used for TSDL (Teacher Student Data Link) to determine if the course is on-line or not. The Satisfies Graduation Requirement fields allow the entry of up to eight (8) grad requirements. When the students reach the maximum credits for the first grad requirement, it will check to see if there is one in the next field. If so, the credits will be applied to that grad requirement.

Page 8: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 4

SCH.310 – Course Definitions (cont’d) The Satisfies State Grad Requirement fields allow the entry of up to eight (8) grad requirements. When the students reach the maximum credits for the first grad requirement, it will check to see if there is one in the next field. If so, the credits will be applied to that grad requirement. The Course Enrollment field is where the State defined Math and Science categories were maintained. These are no longer required to be reported. The Advanced & Accelerated Program Model field is where the State defined Program Model will be entered. The Advanced & Accelerated Program Options fields are where the State defined Program Options will be entered. Remove Course from Transcript: To completely remove the transcript record for this course for all students when GR.802 program is run, enter 'Y' in this field. To retain the transcript records for this course, enter 'N' in this field. Note! To remove the transcript records for this course, you must enter 'N' in the 'Applies to State Graduation Requirements?'. If the 'Applies' field is 'Y', the record will not be removed. Remove GPA from Transcript: Enter 'Y' to keep the transcripted record in the transcript file but have the GPA amounts removed. When GR.802 is run, the GPA points will be removed and the 'Use in GPA' flag will be set to 'N'.

Rmv District Credits from Trnscrpt: Enter 'Y' to keep the transcripted record in the transcript file but have the district Credit Attempted and Credit Earned fields cleared out when GR.802 is run.

Page 9: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 5

GRD.201 – Grade Titles Attendance data must be downloaded for submission, and setup is required within GRD.201 – Grade Titles. A grade title for the Fall (SRF), Spring (SRS), and End of Year (SRE) must be set up. Location of the grade titles within GRD.201 is insignificant, but the titles must be SRF, SRS, & SRE. Fall, Spring and End of Year are the regularly scheduled submissions required by the State. SGS Grade Titles Ref: GRD.201 .11

District ZPS School TST BARB'S TEST Year 01

Title Description Final? Compute?

1 MP1 MARKING PERIOD 1 _ _

2 MP2 MARKING PERIOD 2 _ _

3 EX1 1ST SEMESTER EXAM _ _

4 SM1 SEMESTER 1 FINAL Y _

5 MP3 MARKING PERIOD 3 _ _

6 MP4 MARKING PERIOD 4 _ _

7 EX2 2ND SEMESTER EXAM _ _

8 SM2 SEMESTER 2 FINAL Y _

9 SRF SRSD ATTENDANCE-FALL _ _

10 SRS SRSD ATTENDANCE-SPRING _ _

11 SRE SRSD ATTENDANCE-END OF YR _ _

12 ___ ___________________ _ _

FINAL grades will be posted to the transcript file. Other grades

will be available throughout this fiscal year.

ATT.650 – Post Summarized Absence History Attendance information entered through the Student Attendance System will be posted using this program. For State Reporting grade titles, students must be absent the entire day for any to post. If a student attends school for any portion of the day, attendance will not be reduced for reporting purposes. (This only applies when attendance is posted for SRF, SRS, and SRE grade titles). ATT.650 no longer has to be run only on Count Day, as long as your SR.260 is set up for the current year. Note! If there are students that are scheduled for only four (4) periods of a six (6) period day (for example), when attendance is posted, it will not post correctly unless a 1.00 is entered for periods five (5) and six (6) in the ATT.101.12 screen. Verify the periods that attendance is taken in ATT.101.11. SAS Post Summarized Absence History Ref: ATT.650P.01

Process for: District: ZPS School: TST Fiscal Year: 01

Date: 092304 Thru 021005 Grade Title: SRS

Date: Thru Grade Title: ___

Date: Thru Grade Title: ___

Option: 1 Repost? Y

1 = Post absences for selected grade titles.

2 = Post absences for selected classes.

3 = Post absences for selected courses and sections.

4 = Post absences for selected students.

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 10: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 6

ATT.650 – Post Summarized Absence History (cont’d) Date: Enter the date range for the reporting period attendance that is being posted. Please refer to the State website for information on the count dates. Grade Title: Enter the grade title for the reporting period being posted. These are the grade titles (SRF, SRS, and SRE) set up in GRD.201 – Grade Titles. Repost?: For reporting periods, always answer ‘Y’ in this field. This will ensure that all attendance is included for those students that left the district and returned during the reporting period. Once data has been posted using ATT.650 – Post Summarized Absence History, the information can be maintained using ATT.450 – Maintain Summarized Absence History.

GRD.601 – Set Student Date of Graduation This program is run to set a graduation date for those students that are graduating. This date is used as the withdrawal date for the graduate students. The exit information for graduates will only be reported at the EOY cycle. The State requests that you use the day after the student’s last day of school, graduated, or left. If you have a number of students who are graduating at the end of semester one (1), you may wish to use this program. If only a few students are graduating, it may be easier to just manually modify these records. SGS Set Student Date of Graduation Ref: GRD.601P.01

Process for:

District: ___

School: ___

Date: ________ (Leave blank to remove date)

Limit to:

Class: 12

or

Student No. __________

Note: When processing an entire class, only students that will not

be attending the same school again next year will be set.

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Enter the district, school and date to be used as the graduation date. The graduation date will only need to be set for Class 12. To set the entire class, leave the Student No. field blank. This program must be run before you create your End of Year file. To verify whether or not you have run this program, you may view the student’s transcript file in GRD.450. If it is necessary to modify the graduation date for individual students, this can be accomplished in file pgrd301 in smsfile library, through DFU.

Page 11: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 7

STU.801 – Run Year End Procedure to Promote Students This program will automatically change the administrative unit for students promoting from one building to another within the district. Also, a withdrawal record will be written to the registration record for a student that is currently in 12th grade and the next year information is different. A note has also been added to the screen reminding users that GRD.601 (Set Student Date of Graduation) must be run prior to running promotions. If a date is not found in PGRD301, a withdrawal record will not be created. When SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD is ran, any student that is currently in grade 12 and their next year grade is not 12 or blank, will receive an exit status of ‘01’ and the exit date assigned in GRD.601. Each district in CIMS also has the option of pulling the graduation exit status from a tag or an attribute. Please refer to the SRSD98 – SRSD/CIMS Setup Programs section of this manual to assist you with the setup for this option. If these options are not used, the exit code will default as stated above. SMS Run Year End Procedure to Promote Students Ref: STU.801P.01

PROMOTE STUDENTS

This program will promote ALL students

in your file. From School Year 04 to 05

STUDENT RECORD OPTIONS must be set

for each school district before

running this program.

GRADUATION YEAR must be set.

Run GRD.601 before running this program.

ALWAYS update last year information? Y

(If `N`, only updates when District or

School changes)

F3=Exit F5=Reset F12=Cancel F13=Process

Pressing F13 after accessing the initial screen will prompt the following screen. Enter the date, code and comment to be used when creating a withdrawal record for those students without a next year school and district in basic student information. SMS Run Year End Procedure to Promote Students Ref: STU.801P.02

PROMOTE STUDENTS

This program will promote ALL students

in your file. From School Year 04 to 05

All students without a next year school and district

will receive a withdrawal record in the prior year.

Please complete the following information needed for

creating the withdrawal record.

Withdrawal Date: 06/15/07

Withdrawal Code: 01

Withdrawal Comment: _________

If this is what you want to do, confirm

by pressing F13=PROCESS key.

Page 12: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 8

STU.280 – Student Tag Definitions This program is used to maintain data in a single item tag such as Nutrition Eligibility codes, Graduation Exit Status codes, Homeless Status codes and Multiple Birth codes. (You can also store this data in General Student Attributes). If you would like to access the data once a student is promoted to a graduate district, the tag will also need to be defined in that school. You must define five (5) tags to indicate programs that a student is participating in for field #125 – Program Eligibility/Participation II – to represent Alternative Education, Developmental/Retention Kindergarten, Out-of-State, 21st Century Learning and International Student. The tag identifier can be anything the district chooses. The tags that are set up are then identified within the district definitions (SR.280). When SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD is run, it will pull the information accordingly. SMS Student Tag Definitions Ref: STU.280 .11

Tag GRD Short Title GRAD EXIT CD Category District ESD

Description GRADUATION EXIT CODE FOR SRSD

Are tag assignments deleted at year end? N

Can this tag be transferred to other schools? Y

Does this tag have associated Data? Y

IF YES:

What type of data 1

1 = Single Item Verified? Y

2 = Columnar

3 = Text

Is the Data Restricted? N

Columnar Data Headings:

_________ ___________ ___________ __________ __________ __________ __________

If you enter ‘Y’ in the ‘Verified’ field, a second screen will appear where verification data will be defined. This means that when a student is assigned this tag, the program will ask the user to enter additional information. If this information does not match an entry in the verification table, an error will occur. SMS Student Tag Verification Data Ref: STU.280L.

Tag: GRD GRADUATION EXIT CODE Category:

Valid data for GRAD EXIT CD 01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

12

13

Page 13: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 9

STU.107 – General Student Attributes This program can be used to define district wide General Student Attributes. The SRSD programs can pull data from General Student Attributes for Native Language, Ethnic Code, Nutritional Eligibility Code, Graduation Exit Code, Residency Status, Resident District, Homeless Status and Multiple Births. For more information regarding the General Student Attributes, please refer to your CIMS manual titled Student Management System User Guide. SMS General Student Attributes Ref: STU.107 .11

Description Required? Table Low High

1. Year of Graduation N N 00 99

2. Native Language N Y __ __

3. Ethnic Group N Y __ __

4. SO LUNCH CODE N N __ __

5. Mom Lev of Educ N Y __ __

6. ____________________ _ _ __ __

7. WY School of Choice N Y __ __

8. Economic Indicator N Y __ __

9. ____________________ _ _ __ __

10. Lunch Code N Y __ __

11. Graduation Exit Code N Y __ __

12. Residency Status 12 N Y __ __

13. Resident District 13 N Y __ __

14. Educating District14 N Y __ __

15. Nonconventional Cate N Y __ __

Graduation Requirement Plan Attribute Location: 1

STU.108 – Table Values for Student Attributes This program is used to define the values that can be stored in the General Student Attributes defined in STU.107. This program is used along with the link programs for attribute values detailed in the next section of this manual. SMS Index of Table Values Ref: STU.108X.02

Position to Attribute: __ Value: __

"X" Value Description Attribute

C BA BAY 13

_ BD BANGOR TWP DIST 13

_ BP BANGOR PUBLIC 13

_ BT BANGOR TOWNSHIP 13

_ EH ESSEX./HAMPTON 13

_ PN PINCONNING 13

SMS Table Values for Student Attributes Ref: STU.108 .11

Value: BA Attribute: 13 District Residence

Description: BAY_____________

Protecting the UIC Field UIC field protection is possible if you take advantage of switch settings in ACS.350 & ACS.310. Follow the instructions on the next four (4) pages for setup instructions.

Page 14: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 10

ACS.350 - Maintain Program Technical Definitions

The definition for STU301C, ST.3301 (Basic Student Information), STU.301MC and ST.3301M (Access to All Student Records) will all need to updated, in order to protect the UIC field completely. Be certain that Program uses switches? in ACS.350.12 is set to ‘Y’.

ACS Technical Definition Ref: ACS.350 .12

Program Name STU301C

Program is coded to handle the selection of:

Default Document Id? N (Y/N)

Number of copies? N (Y/N)

Cut-off Date? N (Y/N)

Form-type? N (Y/N)

Program Generates a report? N (Y/N)

Prompt for printer overrides? N (Y/N)

Program uses switches? Y (Y/N)

Program requires a client? Y (Y/N)

Press <Enter> again to reach screen reference: ACS.350.13. Verify the switch on line 14 is entered as shown below. If line 14 is empty, add the following text to switch #14, ‘Only allow users w/access to restricted tag to change UIC#s?’.

If switch #14 is already being used for a different switch, please contact CMT for further direction. Remember, you must do this for both STU301C and STU301MC. ACS Technical Definition Ref: ACS.350 .13

Program Name STU301MC

Description of Switch (Y = 1 or ON)

1. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

2. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

3. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

4. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

5. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

6. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

7. Allow changes to Last Year information?______________________(Y/N)

8. Enable call to STU308 for custom student record?_____________(Y/N)

9. Apply excess credits to ELECTIVE on graduation status?_______(Y/N)

10. Should credit earned be adjusted when credits are applied?___(Y/N)

11. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

12. Display course attendance absences?__________________________(Y/N)

13. Display discipline records in ascending order?_______________(Y/N)

14. Only allow users w/access to restricted tag to change UIC#s? (Y/N)

15. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

16. _____________________________________________________________(Y/N)

Mode: Change Cancel? N

Note! The switch settings that you see listed on your system could vary, depending on the custom programs you may have.

Page 15: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 11

ACS.310 - Maintain Menu Item Definitions Once the switch setting is established in ACS.350 - Maintain Program Technical Definitions, you must turn the switch setting on or off using ACS.310 – Maintain Menu Item Definitions. You must do this for both menu items STU.301 and STU.301M. On the command screen, use the Change command to access the menu items mentioned above. Continue pressing <Enter> until the screen reference ACS.310.13 is accessed. Locate the Switch Setting ‘Only allow users w/access to restricted tag to change UIC#s?’. 2/11/03 COMPUTER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC 12:28:48 QPADEV000A

ACS Menu Item Definition Ref: ACS.310 .13

Item STU.301 Basic Student Information

Program Options

Default Family Record access to "Y"? Y (Y/N)

Default Emergency Record access to "Y"? N (Y/N)

Default Registration Record access to "Y"? N (Y/N)

Default Tag Assignments access to "Y"? N (Y/N)

Default Request Records access to "Y"? N (Y/N)

Default Health Records access to "Y"? N (Y/N)

Allow changes to Last Year Information? N (Y/N)

Enable call to STU308 for custom student record? N (Y/N)

MEAP? N (Y/N)

Include old & new family members on change of family number? N (Y/N)

Default SRSD Record Access to "Y"? Y (Y/N)

Only allow users w/access to restricted tag to change UIC#s? Y (Y/N)

Mode: Change Cancel? N

If the UIC number field is to be protected, then you must enter ‘Y’. (This will restrict all users.) Then, follow the instructions for STU.282 in order to specify which users will have access to the UIC field. Entering ‘N’ will allow all users to maintain the UIC number field.

Page 16: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 12

STU.282 - Access to Restricted Tags If you have protected the UIC number field on the Basic Student Information screen by turning the switch setting to ‘Y’ in ACS.310 - Maintain Menu Item Definitions, you must then give users the authority to maintain the field, by adding them to STU.282 – Access to Restricted Tags. To add a user, on the command screen use the Add command and enter the System i/AS400 User ID that you are giving authority to. You MUST use the tag category of UIC and leave the District field blank. (Because UIC numbers may have to be maintained for students that have dropped from the district, users should be entered into this program with a blank district ID.) SMS Access to Restricted Tags Ref: STU.282 .01

A User Id BARBK Category UIC District ___

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup

Index Index: 1

End 1 = Access Records

2 = Districts

Auto Next Record? N

After completing the command screen as above, press <Enter> the user is presented with the maintenance screen. No action is required on this screen, simply verify that the information is correct and press Enter to save. Note! If you have users entered into STU.282 - Access to Restricted Tags, but the switch setting is set to ‘N’, they will still have access to the field, not just those set up in STU.282. You must turn the switch setting to ‘Y’ in ACS.310 and enter the user into STU.282.

STU.303 – Maintain Student Discipline Records Expulsion records for all students and Suspension records for Special Ed students are submitted through the three General Collection counts throughout the year. For non-CMT Special Ed users: STU.303 will now be looking at SR.301SE to indicate (with the *** indicator) whether a student is in Special Education. This is also the field that is checked to determine whether or not the state Incident code should be entered; that in combination with the SR.250 mapping for the Action code. If the Action code is mapped to EXE, the state fields are required. If the Action code is mapped to SUS, and the student has a non-dropped MSDS Special Education record as of the day of the incident, then the state fields will be required. Note the Date, Time and Offense codes are required fields and cannot be readily changed once a record is added. (For assistance in changing these fields, refer to the Student Discipline manual or contact CMT.)

Page 17: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 13

STU.303 – Maintain Student Discipline Records (cont’d) CMTSMS Maintain Student Discipline Records Ref: STU.303 .11

Student Id: 3818 AMY R. KOLKA FEMALE Age: 19

Class: 07 Year: 11 Counselor: ARNOLD Phone: 222-2222

Notes: N

Offense

Date: 10/05/10 Time: 10:00 Code: FTG Unit: ___ Referral: ___ Days: 2.00

Action

Date: 10/10/10 Code: SUS

Dist: ASD Schl: AJH Teacher: BOND__ Administrator: BONHAM

MSDS Expulsion Fields and Special Ed Suspension Fields

Incident Type: 1 Incident Id: *ADD_______ Follow-up: 25 Serious Bodily Injury: N Sexual Assault: N

District Use/Non-MSDS Incident Location: __ Incident time: 1

Incident Cost: $______ Primary Victim : 1

When multiple students are involved in the same disciplinary incident, the state is requiring the discipline records to contain the same Incident ID code. When a new discipline record is added, the default value for the Incident ID field is *ADD, meaning the program will automatically generate an Incident ID number.

MSDS Expulsion Fields and Special Ed Suspension Fields

Incident Type: 1 Incident Id: 1010010003 Follow-up: 1

Once a system generated number is produced (visible in the record with a Change or Look command), this same Incident ID number may be added to other records for students involved in the same incident. Please note that CIMS does NOT allow for entry of multiple actions for the same incident. To add a separate action for state reporting purposes, use SR.301 after all records have been cleaned and the file is nearly ready for the state. SR.301 will allow you to add three actions per incident.

Page 18: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 14

SCH.320 – Master Schedule/SH.320T The new TSDL (Teacher Student Data Link) submission requires all teachers associated with a student’s scheduled courses be included in the submission. Standard CIMS only allowed for the entry of a single instructor, so this screen has been modified. In the Master Schedule – SCH.320, an F6 key has been added to allow for the entry of additional instructors, when utilizing the Change command. SMS Master Schedule Ref: SH.320T .11

District: ASD School: AJH Course: ENG 07 Section: 3

Main Teacher: GROSSE Mentor? Y

CMD Mentor? Teacher ID Teacher Name CMD Mentor? Teacher ID Teacher Name

A Y WRONGE A Y FOOTE_

A Y HATCH _ _ ______

_ _ ______ _ _ ______

_ _ ______ _ _ ______

_ _ ______ _ _ ______

Mode: Change Valid Commands: A D F3=Exit F12=Cancel

This screen, SH.320T is also accessible as a stand-alone program and may be placed on any menu you choose. When adding teachers directly through the stand-alone version of the program, it is necessary to use the Add command.

STU.240 – Teacher Maintenance File District, school and teacher ID will be pulled from the first screen. Then this program is used to maintain the teachers in a specific district and school. You can edit their short name, social security number, email address, their first and last name, and their Teacher of Record Number. SMS Teachers Ref: STU.240 .11

District: ZPS

School: TST

Teacher: MIKE J

Short Name: Michael Jordan

Soc. Sec.: 000-00-0000

Email: [email protected]

Teacher No.: 006

Name Last: Michael

First: Jordan

Teacher of Record Number: 5554443332

District: A district code can be up to three (3) characters. Make sure district codes were defined using program STU.334 - District Information. School: A school code can be up to three (3) digits. Make sure school codes were defined using program STU.320 - School Information.

Page 19: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 15

STU.240 – Teacher Maintenance File (cont’d) Teacher: Use this field to enter a staff ID which can be up to six (6) characters. Weidenhammer Systems Corporation (WSC) recommends that you use at least the first three (3) characters of the name as the first three (3) characters of the ID since the system sorts reports by ID. First Name: Enter the staff member's first name up to 15 characters. A First Name is required for those that are to be downloaded to Inform. Last Name: Enter the staff member's last name up to 20 characters. A Last Name is required for those that are to be downloaded to Concert Inform. If no Last Name exists, a record will not be downloaded. Short Name: Use this field to enter the staff member's name (or an abbreviated version of it). The system prints the name on reports, schedules, and report cards. You can enter up to 15 characters. Soc. Sec.: Use this field to enter the staff member's nine (9) digit Social Security Number. Do not enter hyphens or spaces. E-mail: Use this field to enter the staff member's complete email address. You have up to 70 characters. This field is required in order for the staff member to be downloaded to Concert Inform. Teacher No.: This number represents the internally generated CIMS ID number. You cannot change this number - it is ‘display only’. Teacher of Record Number: The first ten characters represent the Pic number used for TSDL. Note! You cannot field exit in this field or it will place the data in the last ten spaces and TSDL only looks in the first ten. Refer to MSD.940 – Update Pic Number.

MSD.940 – Update PIC Number In addition to teacher data being extracted from SCH.320/SH.320T, the PIC number for each teacher will be pulled from STU.240 when the TSDL submission file is built. As long as the teacher has a social security number in both STU.240 and MR.319, program MSD.940 can be run to pull the PIC number from MR.319 and populate the first 10 digits of the Teacher of Record Number in STU.240. Name Last: Bond____________________________________

First: James___________________________________

Teacher of Record Number: 5554443332_____

MSD.940 can be limited by school or teacher when run.

CMTSMS Update Pic Number.........................CMT Ref: MSD.940P.01

District: ASD

Limit to:

School: AJH

Teacher: ______

Page 20: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 16

SRSD99/MSDS99 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Codes

These menus contain programs for maintaining the various codes required for State Reporting submissions. The codes within these programs will be maintained by CMT, with the exception of SR.104 which you must maintain.

SRSD98 – SRSD/CIMS Setup Programs Items on this menu are crosswalk programs that need to be set up prior to the use of the State Reporting software.

SR.200 – Maintain Links to State School and District The district IDs (STU.334 – District Information) and the school IDs (STU.320 – School Information) established in CIMS need to be linked to the LEA/District (SR. 146), School Code (SR.147), Operating ISD (SR.104) and County of Residence (SR.105). Once this information is completed for each school, the above mentioned items will default within each student’s MSDS record. The Resident District can be automatically updated for students by setting up Maintain District Definitions for SRSD (SR.280). For more information, please see SR.280 – Maintain District Definitions. If a student is transferred between schools/districts using program STU.301T – Student Transfer, the information in the SR.301B will be updated accordingly. Otherwise, changes to the student’s school and district must be maintained manually within both the student basic record and State Reporting record. CMTSMS Maintain Links to State School and Dist...CMT Ref: SR.200 .11

District: ZPS

School: TST

LEA/Op. Dist.: 70350

State School: 5141

Operating ISD: 01

County of Res: 70

State District: Enter the State LEA/District number. These numbers are maintained using SR.146 - Maintain Basic - LEA/District. State School: Enter the State School Code. These codes are maintained using SR.147 - Maintain Basic - School Code. Operating ISD: Enter the Operating ISD that was entered using SR.104 - Maintain EO Operating ISD/ESA. County of Res: Enter the County in which your district/ISD is located. These codes are maintained in SR.105 - Maintain County of Residence Code.

Page 21: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 17

SR.210 - Maintain Links to State Classes Use this program to link your school’s class information defined in CIMS (STU.322 – School Class Information) to those used by the State. Please refer to the State website for the State required Grade Level/Educational Setting Codes. Because the MEAP program MP.010 looks at the class levels when building the Pre-ID file, it is necessary to have ALL class levels you wish to be included in the MEAP file mapped in SR.210. Note! For students who are in a program that a grade level is not reported for, link the CIMS class for this program and leave the State Class blank. CMTSMS Maintain Links to State Classes...........CMT Ref: SR.210 .11

District: ZPS

School: ECC

Class: K_

State Class: 00

State Class: Enter the Grade Level used by the State. In the example above, school ECC uses ‘K’ to represent Kindergarten. This screen must be completed since the State class definition for Kindergarten is ‘00’.

SR.220 – Maintain Links to State Ethnic Codes If your CIMS ethnic codes set up in STU.108 (General Student Attribute Values) do not match those specified by the State, you will use this program to link your district codes to the State’s codes. Maintenance within this program is not necessary if the State-specified codes are the same. For example, in this district, ‘04’ represents Hispanic students. The State code for Hispanics is ‘06’.

CMTSMS Maintain Links to State Ethnic Codes......CMT Ref: SR.220 .11

District: ZPS

CIMS Ethnic Code: 04

State Ethnic Code: 06

01 = American Indian/Alaska Native

02 = Asian American

03 = Black or African American

04 = Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Isle

05 = White

06 = Hispanic or Latino

State Ethnic Code: Enter the State Ethnic Code you are linking to your CIMS code.

Page 22: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 18

SR.230 – Maintain Links to State Exit Status Codes Use this program to link your district’s withdrawal codes to the exit status codes required by the State. Codes must be maintained whether or not they match the State exit codes. For example, if you are already using 09 in your district to represent ‘moved out of state’, you still need to enter a record into this program. Note! The default code of 19=Expected to Continue will be used for all students without a withdrawal record. Users do not need to maintain the 19=Expected to Continue within the students’ record. The code of 19 will automatically be placed in the students expected to continue when building the SRSD files. The code of 19 should NOT be used when students transfer between buildings within the same district. Set up a different code for these students (i.e. TI = Transfer in District). Exceptions must be manually maintained in the State Reporting programs or by tags or attribute values. The student promotion program STU.801 will record a drop record for graduating students. If the student is not returning to class 12, it is assumed the student is graduating, and will receive a withdrawal record. On the command screen, enter the command you wish to execute and choose the CIMS Exit Status Code that you are linking to a State code. Pressing <Enter> accesses the following maintenance screen where you may enter the State code that you are linking to your CIMS code. For example, in this district, ‘W’ represents students who have withdrawn and their continuing plans are unknown. The State code for unknown withdrawals is ‘16’. CMTSMS Maintain Links to State Exit Status Codes...CMT Ref: SR.230 .11

District: ZPS

CIMS Exit Status: W_

State Exit Code: 16

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 23: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 19

SR.250 – Maintain Links to Disposition Codes Expulsion information must be submitted for all students. In-School and Out-of-School Suspensions greater than a half day in length must also be submitted for Special Education students. Any student meeting these requirements from the previous count date must be reported. An Action ID of EXP for expulsions and SUS for suspensions will be used for downloading purposes. Many clients have multiple codes to represent/categorize expulsions and suspensions. This program is used to maintain the links between existing codes used and those required for SRSD downloads. Note! This program must be set up even if you are already using the EXP and the SUS codes. CMTSMS Maintain Links to Disposition Codes.......CMT Ref: SR.250 .01

A Disposition Code SPE District ASD

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup

Index Index: 1

End 1 = Disposition Codes Entered

2 = Suspension/Disposition Codes

3 = Districts

Auto Next Record? N

Enter the CIMS code you wish to have mapped to the SUS or EXP code. CMTSMS Maintain Links to Disposition Codes.......CMT Ref: SR.250 .11

District: ASD AMERICAN SCHOOL DISTRICT

CIMS Disposition Code: SUS STUDENT HAS BEEN SUSPENDED

SUS or EXP Code: SUS (SUS/EXP)

State Action Type: 2 OUT-OF-SCHOOL SUSPENSION

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Define whether the CIMS code you are adding to the link file is a suspension (SUS) or expulsion (EXP). Note! As in the example above, if your district already uses the EXP and SUS codes, you still must enter a record in this link file or the records will not be pulled into your SRSD file.

Page 24: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 20

SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates Note! This program should be set up prior to the beginning of school. The SR.260 program must be set up for each year, designating the count dates that are to be used when calculating the ending date for the period being posted. These dates will also default the count dates into SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD. This program is member specific. Enter the command you wish to use along with the SRSD Download Year to be maintained. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Download Dates..............CMT Ref: SR.260 .11

SRSD Download Year: 11

SRSD Fall Date: 9/29/10

SRSD Spring Date: 2/09/11

SRSD EOY Date: 6/30/11

Last Scheduled Day of School: 6/06/10

Special Ed Child Count Submission Date: 11/17/10

Enter the count dates for Fall, Spring, EOY and Last Scheduled Day of School into the appropriate fields. You must also maintain the date for the Fall General Collection of which is now the Count Day for Special Ed.

SR.240 – Maintain Schools and Classes to Bypass for Reporting There may be schools and/or class levels within your district that do not require submission of data. You will need to identify those using the SR.240 program. When the submission file is created, schools and class levels defined in this program will not be downloaded. It is recommended you verify the schools and classes stored in this file each year. On the command screen, enter the command you wish to execute along with CIMS District ID, School ID and Class that you wish to be excluded from the download. Pressing <Enter> will access the maintenance screen that will confirm you have selected the correct school and district from the command screen to exclude. CMTSMS Maintain Schools to Bypass for reporting..CMT Ref: SR. 240 .11

District ZPS COMPUTER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

School TST CMT’S HIGH SCHOOL

Class P1

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 25: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 21

SR.270 – Maintain Links from Resident LEA to Attribute Value If you maintain each student’s resident LEA on the Basic Student Information Screen within an attribute, use this program to maintain a link between the CIMS Residency Attribute value and the State Residency LEA Code (reported in SRSD Field #4). Note! This information is downloaded from CIMS when you run SR.500. If student Resident LEA Attribute is blank, SR.500 will use the current school and district in STU.301 and copy it into SR.301B and SR.301. It is recommended that you verify the Resident LEA value for all School-of-Choice students after running SR.500. On the command screen, enter the command you wish to execute along with CIMS Residency Attribute Value, Number and CIMS District that you are linking to the State code. Pressing <Enter> accesses the SR.270 maintenance screen where you may enter the State Residency Code you would like to link to the CIMS Attribute Value. CMTSMS Maintain Links from Res. LEA to Attribute...CMT Ref: SR.270 .11

CIMS District . . . . . . . . : ZPS

CIMS Residency Attribute #. . : 13

CIMS Residency Attribute Value: ZE

State Residency Code . . . . : 70350

State Residency Code: Enter the State Residency Code you would like to link to the CIMS Attribute Value.

SR.272 – Maintain Links from Resident Status to Attribute Value If you maintain each student’s resident status on the Basic Student Information Screen within an attribute, use SR.272 to maintain a link between the CIMS Residency Status Attribute Value and the State Residency Status Code. Note! This information is downloaded from CIMS when you run SR.500. If student Resident Status Attribute is blank, SR.500 will fill the default resident status of 14 (resident) in SR.301B and SR.301. Enter the command you wish to use along with CIMS Residency Status Attribute Value, Number and CIMS District that you are linking to the State code. Pressing <Enter> accesses the SR.272 maintenance screen, where you may enter the State Resident Status Code you would like to link to the CIMS Attribute Value. CMTSMS Maintain Links from Res. Sts to Attribute...CMT Ref: SR.272 .11

CIMS District . . . . . . . . : ESD

CIMS Resident Status Attr. # : 12

CIMS Resident Status Value . : NR

State Resident Status Code . : 04

State Resident Status Code: Enter the State Resident Status Code you would like to link to the CIMS Attribute Value.

Page 26: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 22

SR.274 – Maintain Links from Resident County to Attribute Value If you choose to maintain the Resident County through an attribute (highly recommended), you will need to map the attribute values used in the SR.274 program. Previously, Resident County was tracked through the Residency Status attribute value and mapped in SR.272. With the Spring 2010 load, a conversion program was run, which copied the values from SR.272 into SR.274. Upon notification that your load is completed, you will need to update the attribute value in SR.280 for the attribute you wish to use. You should also verify that all data was copied accurately from SR.272 into SR.274 and update the attribute if necessary. CMTSMS Maintain Links from Res. County Attribute.CMT Ref: SR.274 .11

CIMS District . . . . . . . . : ASD

CIMS Resident County Attr. # : 09

CIMS Resident County Value . : BA

State Resident County Code . : 02

Note! You may continue to use the ‘old’ method of tracking the Resident County via the Residency Status, but you will still need to enter the mapping in SR.274.

Page 27: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 23

SR.280 – Maintain District Definitions for SRSD This program allows you to designate attributes or tags for a number of State reported fields. You must also specify which submission you are working with F, S or E. This switch works with the SR.430 program to set the count date field to calculate the student’s age as of the current count date. If you have not yet set this switch for the current submission, it is possible that all ages being calculated for the Primary Ed Setting field in SR.301SE are producing errors. Setting the switch to a valid code for the first time will resolve this. While you are working on submitting the current count file, you may still allow students to be dropped. The STU.301T – Student Transfer program has been modified to post attendance for all three submission periods (SRF, SRS, SRE) regardless of when the student was dropped. This ensures attendance is posted correctly, even if the student was dropped incorrectly. CMTSMS Maintain District Definitions for SRSD....CMT Ref: SR.280 .11

District: ASD

Multi-racial Attribute Value . . : 07

Hispanic Attribute Value . . : 06

Residency Status Attribute Number: 12

Resident Lea Attribute Number . : 13 Program Eligibility/Participation II

Resident County Attribute Number : 9 Alternative Education Tag . . : AED

Dev/Retention Kindergarten Tag: DVK

Nutrition Elig. Code Attribute # : 08 Out-of-State Tag . . . . . . .: OUT

or Nutrition Elig. Code Tag . . . .: ___ 21st Century Learning Pgm Tag : 21C

International Student Tag . . : INT

Graduation Exit Code Attribute # : 01 10/30 Day Rule Tag . . . . . .: 30D

or Graduation Exit Code Tag . . . .: ___ Section 504 Tag . . . . . . . : 504

Homeless/Unaccomp. Youth Tag : HML

Multi Birth Code Attribute # . . : 14 Personal Curriculum Tag . . . : OPD

or Multi Birth Code Tag . . . . . .: ___ Early/Middle College Tag . . .: COL

S2E2 Tag . . . . . . . . . . .: ST

Use "F", "S", or "E" to designate the current submission: F (Fall/Spring/EOY)

If you use an attribute for Residency Status, Resident LEA, or Nutrition Eligibility Codes, you must use programs SR.270, SR.272, and SR.283 respectively, to link the attribute values to the State codes. This information is pulled from CIMS when you run SR.500.

If student Resident LEA Attribute is blank, SR.500 will pull the current school and district in STU.301 - Basic Student Information and copy into SR.301.

The State codes must be used if you store Graduation Exit Codes in an attribute or a tag. There is not a crosswalk program for these. SR.500 pulls the codes directly from the attribute or tag without checking SR.230 – Maintain Links to State Exit Status Codes. A student must be considered a graduate for the Graduation Exit Code to be pulled. A student is considered a graduate if the current class is 12 and the next year is not 12 or blank.

Page 28: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 24

SR.283 – Maintain Links to State Nutritional Eligibility Codes Use this program to link your CIMS Nutritional Eligibility Codes to the State Nutritional Eligibility Codes. Enter the command you wish to execute along with the CIMS code and press <Enter>. The following maintenance screen is presented, where you may enter the corresponding State Nutritional Value. CMTSMS Link to State Nutritional Elig. Codes.....CMT Ref: SR.283 .11

CIMS Nutritional Eligibility Value: 16

State Nutritional Eligibility Value: 2

Enter the Nutritional Eligibility value assigned to

your students in tags or attributes and the corresponding

State approved code to be reported in SRSD.

CIMS Nutritional Eligibility Value: Enter the CIMS Value you would like to link to a State code. State Nutritional Eligibility Value: Enter the State Value you would like to link to a CIMS code.

SR.285 – Assign Nutritional Eligibility Code by Tag or Attribute Use this program to automatically assign students Nutritional Eligibility Codes in SR.301B by a tag or attribute, if you are NOT using SR.280 to maintain Nutritional Eligibility Codes by tag or attribute. If SR.280 - Maintain District Definitions for SRSD is set up, SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD will extract the Nutritional Eligibility Code from the designated Tag or Attribute. This program is not verifying the data you enter matches the data in SR.280. CMTSMS Assign Nutritional Elig. Code by Tag/Attr.CMT Ref: ST.920P .01

Limit to:

District: ASD

School: AJH

Attribute: __

Tag: NUT

1. Program will clear all Nutritional Elig. codes first.

2. Students who are not assigned the indicated tag or attribute will

have a blank State code.

3. Leave the School blank to process the entire District.

Attribute: If you maintain the Nutritional Eligibility on the Basic Student Information screen, enter the attribute number in this field. Tag: If you maintain the Nutritional Eligibility in a tag, enter the tag assigned to the students in this field. This program is designed to use a simple data tag that contains a single data element with the eligibility code.

Page 29: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 25

SR.400 – Clear Specified Attribute This program can be used to clear the value of an attribute within the Basic Student Information. For example, if your district uses an attribute to maintain information regarding Nutritional Eligibility, you can use this program to clear that field each year, to start with a clean field.

CMTSMS Clear Specified Attribute.................CMT Ref: SR.400P .01

Attribute: 01 Change to Value: 02

Limit to:

District: ASD

School: AJH

Class: 12

Multiple Students: N

Tag: ___

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Change to Value: You may also simultaneously update the attribute that is being cleared by entering the new value in the Change to Value field.

SR.920 – Set Student School Code/County/ISD/Operating ISD This program can be run to ensure that the State school code, County code, ISD and Operating ISD are correct in SR.301B for the school that the student is currently enrolled in. This program can be run at any time, but it doesn’t look at a date to see where a student was enrolled, as of a particular date. It will update the student’s record based on the student's latest enrollment record. Resident District and Resident Status will also be updated if the district definitions are set in SR.280. CMTSMS Set St. schlcd/county/ISD/operisd frm enr.CMT Ref: SR.920P .01

Limit to:

District: ASD

School: AJH AEL AHS ___ ___

___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Include/Omit I (I/O)

(c) Computer Management Technologies Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Note! We do not recommend using this program if Resident District and Resident Status are updated manually or SR.280 is not used to maintain the resident definitions.

Page 30: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 26

SR.940 – Create Withdraw Records for Non-Returning Students Use this program to record withdrawal records in the current year (before promotions) for students who do not have next year district and school information in the Basic Student Information screen. The withdrawal date, withdrawal code and withdrawal comment will be recorded for every student that does not have next year school information filled, so this program should be run with care. CMTSMS Create Withdraw Recs for Non-Returning Stu's Ref: SR.940P .01

District: ASD

Limit to:

School: AJH

Class: __

Multiple Students: Y (Y/N)

The following will be added to each record:

Withdrawal Date: 6/16/05

Withdrawal Code: 16

Withdrawal Comment: UNKNOWN_________

SR.410 – Create Withdrawal Record for Last Year Use this program to create a withdrawal record within LAST year's student records (after promotions) for those students without an enrollment record in this school year. The withdrawal date, withdrawal code and withdrawal comment will be recorded for every student without a current year enrollment, so this program should be run with care. CMTSMS Create Withdrawal Record for Last Year....CMT Ref: SR.410 .01

District: ASD

Print Report Only? Y (Y/N)

(N will create withdrawal record on the date you fill in)

Withdrawal Date: 06/10/03

(Only necessary if updating. Recommend using day after last day of school.)

Withdrawal Code: 09

Withdrawal Comment: Out of State_____

This program will add withdrawal

Limit to: record to LAST year's data

School: AJH when updating.

Class: __

Multiple Students: N (Y/N)

Page 31: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 27

SR.420 - Update Ethnic Codes in SR301B

You may run this program at any time of year to update the Ethnic Codes in your SR.301B file to match the Ethnic Code Attribute you are using in your Basic Student Record. You may run by district for the entire district, by school or the fields may be left blank to process for all districts. SMS Update Ethnic Codes in SR301B FY05 SR.420P .01

Limit To:

District: ASD (Leave District and School blank to

process all districts, including

School: AJH unassigned.)

Do you want to replace the multiple ethnic codes in SR.301B with

the attribute value found in STU.301 if the two do not match?

N (Y/N)

If you choose Y and none of the multiple ethnic codes in SR.301B

match the ethnic attribute in STU.301, the ethnic code in SR.301B

will be cleared and replaced with the ethnic attribute in STU.301.

Example: in SR.301B a student is ranked as both caucasian and african-

american, but the STU.301 ethnic attribute indicates the student is

asian/pacific-islander. After this program completes, both files will

show the student ranked as asian/pacific islander.

F3-Exit F4-Index F5-Reset F12-Cancel

Do you want to replace the multiple ethnic codes in SR.301B with the attribute value found in STU.301 if the two do not match?: If you answer ‘N’ to this field, Ethnic Codes will be updated for all students except those with multiple codes in the SR.301B. Two reports will be generated; one showing the students with multiple ethnic codes that were not updated and a second showing which students had which codes changed. For students whose codes are completely different; example: in STU.301, they are a ‘1’ and in SR.301B they have multiple ethnic codes, as shown here (4 and 6), the program will update the code in SR.301B to 1, when you answer the field ‘Y’. Racial/Ethnic Code (Range 0-6):

American Indian or Alaskan Native . . . : 0

Asian American . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0

Black or African American . . . . . . . : 0

Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander: 1

White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0

Hispanic or Latino . . . . . . . . . . . : 1

However, if even one of the ethnic codes in SR.301B matches the ethnic code in the STU.301, the program will NOT update SR.301B. (Example: If they had 1 and 6 in SR.301B.)

Page 32: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 28

SR.430 - Set SRSD Count Date for SR301IM Records

Use this program to fill the ‘Count Date’ field in both the SR.301IM files (SR.301 and SR.301B will have the Date of Count field filled when SR.500 is run).

Previously, the Count Date field was filled when the SR.560 – Convert to the State Format SR301MI was run.

But because SRSD Field #44 – Primary Educational Setting now requires the student age be validated against the current count date to verify the appropriate code is used, it was necessary to add this program as well as an additional field to SR.280.

Be sure you have the appropriate flag set in SR.280 before running SR.430.

Enter F for Fall, S for Spring and E for End-of-Year.

CMTSMS Set SRSD Count Date for SR301IM Records...CMT Ref: SR.430 .01

Report (Fall/Spring/EOY): F (F/S/E)

Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F12=Cancel

SR.963 – Update SR360WRK Files The SR.963 program can be run any time you believe your class levels in SR.360 are out of sync with the class levels in the student’s registration screen. This program is also executed when the SR.500 program is run.

Initially, you may want to run the program answering ‘N’ to the ‘Update File’ option. This will print a report of all students whose data in the two files do not match. Note that even ‘legitimate’ discrepancies (such as those students who may have changed class levels mid-year) will appear on the report. You may Include/Omit up to 20 Schools or 20 Registers. CMTSMS Update SR360WRK Records...................CMT Ref: SR.963 .01

District: ASD

Limit to:

School: AAA BBB CCC 005 061 999 ___ ___ ___ ___ Include/Omit O

___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Register: CKA CKP CPS CIC ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___Include/Omit I

___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Update File? N (Y/N) Fields in SR360WRK to validate?

Class?.................. Y (Y/N)

Print Report? Y (Y/N) CIMS District/School?... N (Y/N)

State District/School?.. N (Y/N)

State Resident District? N (Y/N)

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Once executed, the program will update the class level in SR.360 (WRK) file, using the class level in the student’s registration screen. A report is generated of all students whose records have been updated.

Page 33: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 29

SR.964 – Create SR360WRK Files This program can be run at any time to create SR.360 records for those students who are missing enrollment and withdrawal records. It is also executed each time the SR.500 program is run and records are created for the current school year only. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Enr/Wthdrl Stu. Data (SR360WRK) Ref: SR.360 .11

CIMS File Id: 2505 School Year: 11

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Entry/Withdrawal Code: E Student Load: 01

CIMS District . . . . . . ASD CIMS School . . . . . . . AJH

Operating District. . . . 70350 Resident District . . . . 70350

School. . . . . . . . . . 4622 CIMS Class. . . . . . . . 08

Resident Status Code. . . 2 Resident County Code. . . 2

Entry/Withdrawal Date . . 9/07/10 Original Enrollment Date. 7/06/05

Alternative Ed?.......... Y (Y/N) Dev/Retention Kindergarten? N (Y/N)

Out of State?............ N (Y/N) 21st Century Learning Pgm? N (Y/N)

International Student?... N (Y/N) Early/Middle College?.... N (Y/N)

10/30 Day Rule?.......... N (Y/N) Section 504?............. N (Y/N)

Nutrition Elig. Code..... 1 S2E2..................... 0

Homeless Code............ __ Unaccompanied Youth...... N (Y/N)

Personal Curriculum...... N (Y/N)

Credit Modification Subject Areas: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Reason:

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

FIXSR.360 - Fix to Update WKYEAR & WKLOD for SR360WRK There is no prompt screen to complete – this job runs in batch for all districts and schools. The Student Load and the School Year fields in the SR.360 file for current year records will be updated when this program is executed. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Enr/Wthdrl Stu. Data (SR360WRK) Ref: SR.360 .11

CIMS File Id: 2505 School Year: 11

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Entry/Withdrawal Code: E Student Load: 01

CIMS District . . . . . . ASD CIMS School . . . . . . . AJH

Operating District. . . . 70350 Resident District . . . . 70350

Page 34: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 30

SRSD01 – Programs for Maintaining SRSD Records

This menu contains the programs used for maintaining the SRSD information for which fields do not already exist within CIMS. Through SR.301B – Input Single Record Basic Information, users have the option to access the additional records that are possible to be associated with the students’ SRSD record. Additional records can also be accessed through individual menu items that exist on this menu.

SR.301B – Input Single Record Basic Information

When a student is enrolled through STU.301, an SR.301B record is created, even if the user doesn’t have access to the SRSD - SR.301B screen. Running SR.500 - Build CIMS Download File for SRSD will also create an SR.301B record for CIMS students who do not currently have one.

CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301B.11

CIMS File Id: 2505 Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Birthdate: 8/01/92 Gender: M Grade/Setting Level: 08

Address: 911 MORNINGSIDE ESSEXVILLE 48664 - 0000

----FTE----

Gen Ed .00

Sec 52 .67

Sec 53 .00

Student UIC# . . .: 1234567890

Racial/Ethnic Code (Range 0-6):

American Indian or Alaskan Native . . . : 1

Asian American . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 1

Black or African American . . . . . . . : 0 At-Risk Students:

Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander: 0 Instructional Services:

White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0 __ __ __ __ __ __

Hispanic or Latino . . . . . . . . . . . : 0 Support Services:

__ __ __ __

Program Enrollment/Eligibility (Y/N/D):

Title 1 . . . . : Y Special Education : Y Early Intervention . : Y

Early Childhood : Y Advanced & Accel . : Y Limited Eng Proficient: N

Migrant Education: Y Adult Education . : Y Immigrant Student . . : Y

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Racial/Ethnic Code: If not already ranked multi-racial through the use of attributes in STU.301, you may rank the student in SR.301B. (Attribute values entered in STU.301 carry forward to this screen). Use only 1s to indicate rank.

At-Risk: Identify up to six (6) Instructional Services up to four (4) Support Services provided to the At-Risk Student.

Program Enrollment/Eligibility: The programs listed in this section are additional records that can be associated with each student’s SRSD record. For those records that are to be maintained, enter ‘Y’ next to the corresponding record. Upon pressing <Enter>, the program will automatically access the records in which ‘Y’ was entered. Note! Section 504 is a Y/N field only, it does not have a separate screen or other fields associated with it.

If you choose to not access an additional record, enter ‘N’ next to the corresponding record. Changing the field to ‘N’ will not delete the existing information in the record, it will simply cause the record to be by-passed. Enter ‘D’ next to any records you wish to delete for this student.

The following are sample screens that a student could have associated with their SRSD record.

Page 35: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 31

SR.301T1 - Input Title 1 Student Information CMTSMS Input Title 1 Student Information.........CMT Ref: SR.301T1.11

CIMS File Id: 000001777

Student Name: GEORGE BAILEY

Title I Targeted Assistance Schools Programs

TAS Instructional Services (Y/N): Y Reading/Language Arts

N English (ESL) for LEP Students

Y Mathematics

N Science

Y Social Studies

Y Vocational/Career

Y Other

TAS Support Services (Y/N) . . : N Supporting Guidance/Counseling

Y Social work, Outreach/Advocacy

N Prevention Education

Y Health

N Dental

Y Eye Care

N Pupil Transportation

N Other

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

SR.301SE - Input Special Education Information Note! The Section 52 FTE will be updated by the FF220 Special Ed FTE field. CMTSMS Input Special Education Information.......CMT Ref: SR.301SE.11

CIMS File Id: 2505 Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

SPECIAL EDUCATION DOB: 08/01/92 Age: 17

FTE in Section 52: .18 FTE in Section 53: _ .00

Primary Disability . . . . . . . . . : 14

Additional Disabilities . . . . . . : __ __

IEP/Implmnt. Date . . . . . . . . . : 5/01/09

Support Service Codes . . . . . . . : 290 291 250 260 280

Program Service Codes . . . . . . . : 160 170 180

Primary Ed. Setting . . . . . . . . : 13

Placement in Dist by Another Dist IEP: _

Exit/Completion Reason . . . . . . . : __

Exited Date . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0/00/00

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 36: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 32

SR.301EI - Input Early Intervention Student Information CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301E.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Early Intervention

Eligibility as Identified on IFSP or IEP: 2

Date of IFSP . . : 5/05/09

Primary Setting : 34

Service Provided Under IDEA Part C:

802 803 809 811 812 814

Exit Completion Reason : 37

Date Exited or Completed: 10/15/09

SR.301EC – Input Early Childhood Student Information Through the SR.301EC maintenance screen, add the appropriate program information for the Early Childhood student. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301EC.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Early Childhood

Program: 6

Start Date: 9/08/09

Delivery Method: 1

Delivery Schedule: 01

County of Residence: 2

Funding Type: __

Exit/Completion Reason : ___

Date Exited or Completed: 0/00/00

District Use Only

Number of Hours Per Session: 2.00

Number of Days Per Week Receiving Services: 3

SR.301GT - Input Advanced & Accelerated Student Info CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Advanced and Accelerated

Program Model: 2

Special Program Options: 01 02 03 04 05

Program Start date: 9/08/09

Program End date: 0/00/00

Comment: GEORGE HAS AN INTERNSHIP AT NASA - SUMMER 2010____

Note! The Advanced & Accelerated program date is not a State required field. This field was added at the request from users.

Page 37: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 33

SR.301BI - Input Bilingual/LEP Student Information CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301BI.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Limited English Proficient

LEP Instructional Program: 5 10

Primary Language: CREOLES AND PIDGINS, PORTUGUESE-BASED (OTHER)___

Additional Language 1: CREOLES AND PIDGINS, FRENCH-BASED (OTHER)_______

Additional Language 2: FRENCH__________________________________________

LEP Exit Reason: __

LEP Date Exited: 00/00/0000

Date Re-entered LEP Program: 00/00/0000

Funding Participation: (Y/N)

Title III Limited English Proficient Program (6841): Y

Title III Immigrant Education Program (6842): N

Section 41 - Pupils of Limited English Ability (6843): N

Locally Funded English Acquisition Pgm (6844): N

District Use/Non-SRSD

First Entered USA School: 02/09/2010

Year of Entry . . . : 2009 Eng. Lang. Prof Test:_ Eng. Lang. Prof. Lvl: ___

Home Country: ____________________________________________________

Home Country of Refugee: ___________________________________________________

Regardless of the position under Funding Participation, Primary Language should be reported; otherwise a warning is issued.

Under the Funding Participation area, if either item 1 or 3 is used, there must be a date in the ‘Date Re-entered LEP Program’ field.

If item 4 is used, there must be a Country code in the ‘Home Country of Refugee’ and Eligibility/Participation must be blank. The SR.560 will remove the Eligibility/Participation flag when converting to the SR301MI format.

SR.301ME - Input Migrant Education Information CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301ME.11

MIGRANT SERVICE INFORMATION

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY Funding for

CIMS File Id: 000001777 Qualifying Move Date: 100103 Service/pgm: 2

Term Instructional Services - Regular Summer

Reading/Language Arts . . . . : N N

English for LEP Children . . : Y Y

Mathematics . . . . . . . . . : N N

Science . . . . . . . . . . . : N N

Social Studies . . . . . . . : N N

Vocational/Career . . . . . . : N N

Other . . . . . . . . . . . . : Y Y Type Y for each service

Term Support Services - Regular Summer provided to the student.

Guidance/Counseling . . . . . : Y Y

Soc Work Outreach or Adv . . : Y Y

Prevention Education. . . . . : N N

Health . . . . . . . . . . . : Y Y

Dental . . . . . . . . . . . : N N

Eye Care . . . . . . . . . . : N N

Pupil Transportation . . . . : N N

Other . . . . . . . . . . . . : N N

Page 38: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 34

SR.301MC - Input Migrant Curriculum Information

A second Migrant screen has been added to accommodate the requirements of the Migrant Curriculum. F4 keys are available in selected fields for indexing. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301MC.1

Student: 000002505 BAILEY, GEORGE M.

-----------COURSE INFORMATION------------ Grade

St St Local Local St St Trm Academic Clock to Final Crs Crdts

Sbj ID ID Title Typ Sec Typ Year Hours Dat Grd Sts Grntd

01 001 ENG 07 ENGLISH 07 _ 02 01 0829 09 - 10 72.00 B__ ___ __ ____

Crs Section Id: ____________________

__ ___ ______ ____________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ ___ ___ __ ____

Crs Section Id: ____________________

__ ___ ______ ____________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ ___ ___ __ ____

Crs Section Id: ____________________

__ ___ ______ ____________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ ___ ___ __ ____

State Subject: Enter a valid two (2) digit SCED Subject Area in this field. The subject area must be previously defined in SR.160. The F4 indexing option is available for this field. State Course ID: Enter a valid three (3) digit SCED Course ID in this field. The Course ID must be previously defined in SR.161. The F4 indexing option is available for this field. Local Course ID: Enter the local course ID. This data is not validated since courses in CIMS may not carry forward from year to year. There is an index available by pressing F4; this will bring up the current assignment year's courses defined in SCH.310. Local Course Title: Enter the local course title. This data is not validated since courses in CIMS may not carry forward from year to year. There is an index available by pressing F4; this will bring up the current assignment year's courses defined in SCH.310. State Type: Enter a valid two (2) digit Course Type in this field. The Course Type must be previously defined in SR.162. The F4 indexing option is available for this field. State Section: Enter a valid two (2) digit Course Section in this field. The Course Section must be previously defined in SR.163. The F4 indexing option is available for this field. State Term Type: Enter a valid four (4) digit Term Type in this field. The Term Type is the prescribed span of time that a course is provided. The Term Type must be previously defined in SR.165. The F4 indexing option is available for this field. Clock Hours: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the number of clock hours to date that the student has completed. Grade To Date: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the grade the student has at the time of withdrawal. Final Grade: Enter the final grade the student has received for this course.

Page 39: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 35

SR.301MC - Input Migrant Curriculum Information (cont’d)

Course Status: Enter the code that describes the student's status in the course. Credits Granted: Enter the credits granted to the student in Carnegie units for the given course or section of the course. Course Section ID: The course section number as it would appear on a student transcript. This code is optional and may be used by entities in combination with the Local Course ID to differentiate between individual classes. (e.g. First period Business Math vs. second period Business Math, or a Language Arts course taught both virtually and in a traditional classroom).

SR.301AE - Input Adult Education Information CIMS File Id: 000002505 Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

ADULT EDUCATION Participant Funding: 2

Diploma/GED Status : 3

Program FTE

July: 4 .25

2 .50

3 .25

Sept: 4 1.00

_ .00

_ .00

Feb.: 4 1.00

_ .00

_ .00

Apr.: 4 1.00

_ .00

_ .00

SR.301II - Input Immigrant Information CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301II.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505 Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

IMMIGRANT STUDENT

Country of Birth: LATVIA___________________________________________________

Year of Entry . : 2007

Comment: GEORGE HAS LIVED IN LATVIA, MADAGASCAR & FIJI.________

Country of Birth: Use this field to identify the country the student was born in. This information is collected by the State of Michigan. Year of Entry: Use this field to enter the year the student came to the United States. This information is collected by the State of Michigan. Comment: Use this field to enter a comment associated with the Immigrant record for this student. This information is NOT collected by the State of Michigan at this time.

Page 40: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 36

SR.301EX – Expulsion Maintenance SR.301EX is for clients who are not using CIMS to maintain their student discipline records. The incident code used must be set up in STU.203 – Suspension/Disposition Codes. SR.301EX will automatically update the CIMS suspension file STU.303 and vice-versa. For this reason, incident codes used must be defined in CIMS. Note! Only records whose codes have been mapped in the SR.250 program will be available in SR.301EX. Expulsion data will be pulled only from the student’s current school year and only from the most current record. Suspension data for Special Education students will be compiled when SR.500 is run and the totals will be posted in the SR.301 file. Note that any ‘IS’ or ‘OS’ (as mapped in SR.255) will only be reported if they are over a half day in length or greater. CMTSMS Input Student Expulsion Record............CMT Ref: SR.301EX.11

CIMS File Id : 2505

Student Name : GEORGE F BAILEY JR.

Incident Code : CHT Incident Date: 05/30/07 Time: 12:00

Expulsion and/or Suspensions for SRSD Reporting

Sus/Exp Code . . . : EXP

Sus/Exp Date . . . : 05/30/07

Expulsion Information

Length of Expulsion. : 60.00

Incident Type . . . : 56

Follow-up . . . . . : 3

Serious Bodily Injury: _

Sexual Assault : _

District Use/Non-MSDS _

Incident Location . : 2

Incident Time . . . 2

Incident Cost . . . : $0

Primary Victim . . . 02

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Length of Expulsion: The length of expulsion is the amount of time in instructional days that the student will be out of school due to the expulsion. Incident Type: Enter the code that represents the primary occurrence that led to the student being expelled. Incident Location: Enter the code that represents the location of where the incident took place. Incident Time: Indicate with the appropriate code whether the incident occurred before, during, or after school hours. Incident Cost: Indicate the estimated or actual cost of out-of-pocket expense to repair or replace the damaged property. Primary Victim: Using the appropriate code, indicate the person to whom the incident was directed.

NOTE – THIS PROGRAM IS NO LONGER BEING UPDATED FOR STATE REPORTING. INCIDENT IDs MUST BE MAINTAINED IN STU.303.

Page 41: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 37

SR.301EX – Expulsion Maintenance (cont’d) Follow-Up: Indicate with the appropriate code, the activity occurring as a result of the expulsion. Serious Bodily Injury: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence with injury and the injury inflicted meets the definition of Serious Bodily Injury per the United States Code paragraph (3) of subsection (h) of section 1365 of title 18:

(3) The term serious bodily injury means bodily injury which involves: (A) a substantial risk of death; (B) extreme physical pain; (C) protracted and obvious disfigurement; or (D) protracted loss or impairment of the function of a bodily member, organ, or mental

faculty. Sexual Assault: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved oral, anal, or vaginal penetration forcibly or against the person's will or where the victim is incapable of giving consent. Includes fondling, indecent liberties, child molestation, and sodomy.

Page 42: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 38

SR.360 – Maintain SRSD Dropped Student Data (SR360WRK) The SR.360 file stores data for all student enrollments and drops. A record is created in SR.360 when any process is used to drop or enroll a student; this includes using STU.301T, STU.805, STU.801 or anytime a record is manually changed into the PATT270 screen. The original enrollment date is written to SR.360 according to the way it was entered in the STU.301 screen on the date the enrollment or drop occurred. If the Original Enrollment date is changed after the enrollment or drop occurred, it is not updated in SR.360. This is true with the other fields as well. Any Math and Science Course Enrollments (as reported for SRSD Field #28) will be written to this file if they are maintained in the SCH.310 – Course Definition file.

CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Enr/Wthdrl Stu. Data (SR360WRK) Ref: SR.360 .11

CIMS File Id: 2505 School Year: 00

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Entry/Withdrawal Code: E Student Load: 01

CIMS District . . . . . . ASD CIMS School . . . . . . . AJH

Operating District. . . . 70350 Resident District . . . . 70350

School. . . . . . . . . . 4622 CIMS Class. . . . . . . . 08

Resident Status Code. . . 14 Resident County Code. . . 02

Entry/Withdrawal Date . . 9/08/09 Original Enrollment Date. 7/06/05

Alternative Ed?.......... N (Y/N) Dev/Retention Kindergarten? N (Y/N)

Out of State?............ N (Y/N) 21st Century Learning Pgm? N (Y/N)

International Student?... N (Y/N) Early/Middle College?.... N (Y/N)

10/30 Day Rule?.......... N (Y/N) Section 504?............. N (Y/N)

Nutrition Elig. Code..... _ S2E2..................... 0

Homeless Code............ _ Unaccompanied Youth...... N (Y/N)

Personal Curriculum...... N (Y/N)

Credit Modification Subject Areas: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Reason: __

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

When CA60 information is entered within the EN.100 screen, it will automatically be written to the SR.360 maintenance file as well, and vice versa. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Enr/Wthdrl Stu. Data (SR360WRK) Ref: SR.360 .12

CIMS File Id: 2505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Sign Out Sheet?.......... Y (Y/N)

CA60 Request Date........ 2/03/09

CA06 Request By.......... SOUTHWEST HIGH SCHOOL

Address 1............ 1574 N. EVANSVILLE ROAD

Address 2............ OAK PARK, MI 45193

CA60 Comment: REQUESTED BY DONNA REED

Page 43: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 39

SR.301RF – Input Special Ed Referral Information The SR.301RF file was created to assist with the State required referral information for Special Education students. The SR.301RF screen is almost identical to the referral screen that is used by CMT Special Ed Software clients. (Note! For those clients using CMT’s Special Ed Software, the SPE.311 – Special Ed Student Referral Maintenance program includes the State required fields.) CMTSMS Input Special Ed Referral Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301RF.01

A Student ID: _____2612 Date: 082405 Bldg: AJH Dist: ASD

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup

Index Index: 1

End

1 = Student Special Ed Referral File

2 = CIMS Student File

3 = Name (L/F) CIMS Student File

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

Auto Next Record? N

Keep in mind that while the SR.301RF program is designed to assist with keeping track of Special Education student referrals, the only fields that are pulled and reported for SRSD are the ‘Parental Consent to Evaluate’, and the ‘Result of Initial IEP’ fields. The ‘Referral Date’ field is used to determine whether a referral should be included in the current submission. In order to fill Field 39c – School Days Beyond Evaluation and Completion of Initial IEP Timeline, the SR.500 program will compare the ‘Parent Permission Received’ date and the ‘Referral Result Received’ date against the default ‘Timeline’ of 30 days. If the school days between the two are over 30, the additional days will be added and Field 39c will be populated with this value in the SR.301 file. CMTSMS Input Special Ed Referral Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301RF.11

Referral Date: 8/12/09

Student ID: 18443 District ID: ASD Attending Bld: AJH

Last- TUSCADERO First- PINKY Middle- ROSE Grade Level 07

IEP Timeline Days Agreed Upon 30 Timeliness of Initial IEP...: 11

MM DD CCYY

Parent Perm Rec..... 9 10 2010 Result of Initial IEP........ 1

Ref. Result Received 9 15 2010 Parent Refused Services...... N

IEP Plcmnt/Implement 1 10 2010 Disability ___ Pgm Serv Code 140

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

Mode: Add F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel Cancel? N

* A switch setting has been created in ACS.310, which allows you to hide the non-SRSD fields within this maintenance program. Only the State Reporting fields are displayed as in the screen above.

Page 44: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 40

SR.301RF – Input Special Ed Referral Information (cont’d)

If a code of 01 (Student was evaluated within 30 School Day Timeline) exists in the ‘Parental Consent to Evaluate’ field and also has a 1 in the Result of Initial IEP (Student was evaluated and found eligible) you are also required to enter a Referral Result Received date. If ‘1’ is used in the ‘Result of Initial IEP’ field, upon entering the date and pressing <Enter>, a SR.301SE maintenance screen is presented, where Special Ed information can be entered. If a Primary Disability and Program Service Code were entered in the referral prompt screen, they will be carried over into the SR.301SE screen. CMTSMS Input Special Ed Referral Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301SE.11

Referral Date: 9/01/06

Student ID: 9998 District ID: ZPS Attending Bld: HB1

Last- TEST First- TEST Middle- TEST Grade Level __

IEP Timeline Days Agreed Upon Timeliness of Initial IEP...: __

MM DD CCYY

Parent Perm Rec..... __ __ ____ Result of Initial IEP........ _

Ref. Result Received __ __ ____ Parent Refused Services...... _

IEP Plcmnt/Implement __ __ ____ Disability ___ Pgm Serv Code ___

Ref. Received....... __ __ ____

Initial IEP......... __ __ ____

Parent Perm Sent.... __ __ ____

Target IEPT......... 99 99 9999

Evaluations: Psy/ ___ IEE/ ___ TC/ ___ SSW/ ___ Med/ ___

Sl/ ___ OT/ ___ PT/ ___ O&M/ ___ Cet/ ___

Misc 1. ______ 2. ______ 3. ______

Help Team _

Comment ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

Mode: Add F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

It is also important to note that if you are using SR.510 to import RMS or MICIS files, that a SR.301RF record will be created. If there are any other Special Education fields in the file that are being imported (such as Disability Code, Special Ed FTE, Primary Educational Setting or Exit date), then a SR.301SE record will also be created.

Note that if the imported file does not have a Referral Date (which is likely, because it’s not a State required field) the date field will appear blank when doing an index in the SR.301RF program.

CMTSMS Index of Special Ed Referral Students Ref: SR.301RX.02

Position to Last Name: ______________ First: ___________

"X" Last Name First Name Referral Date SCH DIS

BAAGEN DAAZ JENA

BAILEY GEORGE 2007 5 28 AJH ASD

BAILEY BAYLEY 1999 11 18 AJH ASD

BALESOFHAY MANYMANY

BANKS MONEY 2006 8 11 AJH ASD

BARTOLOMEI BENJAMIN 1999 11 30 AJH ASD

Page 45: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 41

SR.301ES – Maintain Early Childhood Special Ed Assessment This program is included in both the SRSD01 and MSDS02 menus. Please refer to the MSDS02 section of this manual for detailed information on SR.301ES.

CMTSMS Maintain Ec Special Ed Assessment..CMT Ref: SR.301ES.11

Student Id: 2505 Name: GEORGE W BAILEY

SPECIAL EDUCATION DOB: 08/01/92 Age: 19

Upon Entry Outcome Codes

Special Ed Assessment Tool . . . . . . . . . : 05

Assessment Code 18 Comment . . . . . . . . . : ___________________________________

Entry Assessment Date. . . . . . . . . . . . : _1/10/11 (MM/DD/YY)

1A. Positive Social-Emotional Skills (INCLUDING SOCIAL RELATIONS): 1

2A. Acquiring and Using Knowledge and Skills . . . . . . . . . . : 2

3A. Taking Appropriate Action to Meet Needs . . . . . . . . . . : 1

Upon Exit Outcome Codes and Progress Related to Entry

Special Ed Assessment Tool . . . . . . . . . : 06

Exit Assessment Date . . . . . . . . . . . . : _1/15/11 (MM/DD/YY)

1B. Positive Social-Emotional Skills (INCLUDING SOCIAL RELATIONS): 1

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 1A? . . . . . . : Y (Y/N)

2B. Acquiring and Using Knowledge and Skills . . . . . . . . . . : 2

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 2A? . . . . . . : N (Y/N)

3B. Taking Appropriate Action to Meet Needs . . . . . . . . . . : 1

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 3A? . . . . . . : Y (Y/N)

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Special Ed Assessment Tool – Enter codes: Enter the appropriate code to describe the assessment used. Assessment Code 18 Comment: If you used code 18 for the assessment, you MUST enter a description of the assessment used. Entry Assessment Date: If an entry assessment code (01 - 08) is entered, the date of entry is required. Outcome Codes (1A, 2A, 3A): Report to what extent the child shows age-appropriate functioning, across a variety of settings and situations. These are required fields. Special Ed Assessment Tool – Exit codes: Enter the appropriate code to describe the assessment used. Exit Assessment Date: If an exit assessment code (09 - 18) is entered, the date of exit is required. Outcome Codes (1B, 2B, 3B) - Exit codes: Report to what extent the child shows age-appropriate functioning, across a variety of settings and situations. These are required fields. If these fields are populated, you must enter an exit date. Upon Exit Were New Skills Acquired: Indicate whether the child has acquired new skills or behaviors in the associated area (1A, 2A, 3A). If these fields are populated, you MUST enter an Exit Assessment Date.

Page 46: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 42

SR.301AT – Input SRSD At-Risk Student Information

The SR.301AT is a new program designed to help you keep track of At-Risk data, without having to access the SR.301B screen. Data entered into the SR.301AT program will populate the At-Risk fields in SR.301B automatically, without having to run SR.500. You may delete existing At-Risk information in both SR.301AT and SR.301B using the SR.290 program, Remove Students from Programs & Remove Data program. To manually add At-Risk data to a student record, access the prompt with the Change command and enter the student ID number. Or, if you’re unsure of the ID number, you may select an existing CIMS student using the #2 or #3 indexes to populate the student ID field. The At-Risk maintenance screen is presented, where you may maintain the At-Risk data. CMTSMS Input SRSD At-Risk Student Information....CMT Ref: SR.301AT.11

CIMS File Id: 000003818

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

At-Risk Students:

Instructional Services: 01 02 03 04 __ __

Support Services: 01 03 __ __

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Note! If the SR.301AT record is manually deleted for a student, it will NOT delete the entire SR.301B record, only the At-Risk data that is contained in the SR.301B record.

Page 47: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 43

EN.100 – Change Enrollment History EN.100R – Restricted Change Enrollment History In order to better accommodate the maintenance of the SR.360 file, EN.100 – Change Enrollment History and EN.100R programs has been added to the SRSD01menu. The EN.100R is a “display only” program that allows the records to be viewed but not updated. As enrollment and withdrawal records are added to the student enrollment screen, they will be written to the EN.100 (as well as the SR.360 – Maintain SRSD Enrl/Wthdrl Stu Data program). Records can then be reviewed and changed (but not added) in EN.100. CMTSMS Change Enrollment History.................CMT Ref: EN.100 .11

Student No.: 2505 GEORGE M. BAILEY MALE Age: 16

AMY'S J.H. Class: 08 Year: 09 UIC: 1234567890 Phone: 777-7777

You cannot add new records and can only change/delete current and

previous years data.

Date Code Register Comment Load School District

9/05/08 W C08 M WITHDRAWAL 1 AJH ASD

9/05/07 NE C12 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

9/01/06 E C07 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

8/29/05 E C08 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

10/01/04 E C12 M ENROLLED 1 AHS ASD

5/04/04 E C07 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

1/26/04 10 C03 M EXPELLED AEL ASD

8/26/03 E C03 M ENROLLED 1 AEL ASD

Mode: Change F7=CA60 INFO Cancel? N

Pressing the F7 key will ‘expand’ the enrollment and withdrawal records within the EN.100 maintenance program and allow CA60 information to be maintained. The CA60 data will also be automatically added to the SR.360 maintenance. CMTSMS Change Enrollment History.................CMT Ref: EN.100 .11

Student No.: 2505 GEORGE M. BAILEY MALE Age: 16

AMY'S J.H. Class: 07 Year: 09 UIC: 1234567890 Phone: 777-7777

You cannot add new records and can only change/delete current and

previous years data.

Date Code Register Comment Load School District

9/05/08 E C07 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

Sign Out Sheet: Y (Y/N) CA60 Request Date: 2/03/09

CA60 Comment: REQUESTED BY GLORIA HUDBERG_________

CA60 Request By: LONGWAY HIGH SCHOOL_________________

Address 1: 111 MAIN ST SOMEWHERE, TX 55555_____

Address 2: 2222 DRURY LANE LONDON, ENGLAND

9/05/07 NE C12 M ENROLLED 1 AJH ASD

Sign Out Sheet: N (Y/N) CA60 Request Date: ________

CA60 Comment: ____________________________________

CA60 Request By: ____________________________________

Address 1: ____________________________________

Address 2: ____________________________________

Mode: Change F7=CA60 INFO Cancel? N

Page 48: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 44

MSDS02 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Records

The programs in this menu contain various maintenance files to store and maintain data for the State Reporting submissions.

SR.301B – Input Single Record Basic Information Use SR.301B to enter Early Childhood and Migrant Curriculum information for MSDS reporting. Select the student on the command screen. Also see the SRSD01 Menu section in this manual for details of the accessible screens through SR.301B. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301B.01

C Student No. 2505_________

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup Index: 2

Index 1 = Student Record File 0020

End 2 = Name (L/F) CIMS Student File

3 = CIMS Student File

Auto Next Record? N

Select the record type you would like to enter for the current student by typing ‘Y’ in front of the appropriate selection. To skip accessing a particular record, simply enter ‘N’ next to that record. Use ‘D’ to delete the record. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301B.11

CIMS File Id: 2505 Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Birthdate : 8/01/92 Gender: M Grade/Setting Level: 07

Address: 911 MORNINGSIDE ESSEXVILLE 48664 - 0000

----FTE----

Gen Ed .00

Sec 52 .67

Sec 53 .00

Student UIC# . . .: 123456789

Racial/Ethnic Code (Range 0-6):

American Indian or Alaskan Native . . . : 0

Asian American . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0

Black or African American . . . . . . . : 1 At-Risk Students:

Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander: 0 Instructional Services:

White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 0 __ __ __ __ __ __

Hispanic or Latino . . . . . . . . . . . : 0 Support Services:

__ __ __ __

Program Enrollment/Eligibility (Y/N/D):

Title 1 . . . . : Y Special Education : Y Early Intervention . : Y

Early Childhood : Y Advanced & Accel . : Y Limited Eng Proficient: Y

Migrant Education: Y Adult Education . : Y Immigrant Student . . : Y

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 49: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 45

SR.301EC – Input Early Childhood Information CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301EC.01

A Student No. ______2505 Start Date 050510 Program 03

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup Index: 1

Index 1 = Student Early Childhood File

End 2 = Name (L/F) CIMS Student File

3 = CIMS Student File

Auto Next Record? N

Enter the Program Start Date in MMDDYY format and the Program code for the student. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301EC.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Early Childhood

Program: 03

Start Date: 05/05/10

Delivery Method: 1

Delivery Schedule: 2

County of Residence: 9

Funding Type: __

Exit/Completion Reason : ___

Date Exited or Completed: 0/00/00

District Use Only

Number of Hours Per Session: 4.5____

Number of Days Per Week Receiving Services: 2

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Note! It is recommended you reference the Michigan Department of Education's manual for the Single Record Student Data, as well as the schemas for the MSDS submissions for a detailed explanation of each field. Delivery Method: Select from the F4 Index one of these three (3) codes – (1) School based (2) Community based (3) Home based. Delivery Schedule: Select the code that best represents the schedule that the child is attending for this program or service. This includes part day, all day-alternate day, full day or home-based program and the number of days per week being offered. County of Residence: Enter the appropriate code for the county the student resides in.

Number of Hours Per Session: Enter the number of hours provided at each scheduled session. This field is required for Title 1, Preschool, MSRP and Head Start. Number of Days Per Week Receiving Services: Enter a value less than or equal to seven (7).

Page 50: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 46

SR.301ES – Maintain Early Childhood Special Ed Assessment The Early Childhood Special Ed Assessment component is required for the General Collections and may also be submitted via the Student Record Maintenance Submissions. CMTSMS Maintain Ec Special Ed Assessment..CMT Ref: SR.301ES.11

Student Id: 18515 Name: GEORGIA STATE

SPECIAL EDUCATION DOB: 06/07/09 Age: 1

Upon Entry Outcome Codes

Special Ed Assessment Tool . . . . . . . . . : 05

Assessment Code 18 Comment . . . . . . . . . : ___________________________________

Entry Assessment Date. . . . . . . . . . . . : _1/10/11 (MM/DD/YY)

1A. Positive Social-Emotional Skills (INCLUDING SOCIAL RELATIONS): 1

2A. Acquiring and Using Knowledge and Skills . . . . . . . . . . : 2

3A. Taking Appropriate Action to Meet Needs . . . . . . . . . . : 1

Upon Exit Outcome Codes and Progress Related to Entry

Special Ed Assessment Tool . . . . . . . . . : 06

Exit Assessment Date . . . . . . . . . . . . : _1/15/11 (MM/DD/YY)

1B. Positive Social-Emotional Skills (INCLUDING SOCIAL RELATIONS): 1

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 1A? . . . . . . : Y (Y/N)

2B. Acquiring and Using Knowledge and Skills . . . . . . . . . . : 2

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 2A? . . . . . . : N (Y/N)

3B. Taking Appropriate Action to Meet Needs . . . . . . . . . . : 1

Were new skills/behaviors acquired related to 3A? . . . . . . : Y (Y/N)

Special Ed Assessment Tool – Enter code: Enter the appropriate code (01 - 08 for entries, 09 - 18 for exits) to describe the assessment used. Assessment Code 18 Comment: If you used code 18 for the EXIT assessment, you MUST enter a description of the assessment used.

Entry Assessment Date: If an entry assessment code (01 - 08) is entered, the date of entry is required.

Exit Assessment Date: If an exit assessment code (09 - 18) is entered, the date of exit is required.

Outcome Codes (1A, 2A, 3A): Report to what extent the child shows age-appropriate functioning, across a variety of settings and situations. These are required fields.

Special Ed Assessment Tool – Exit code: Enter the appropriate code to describe the assessment used.

Exit Assessment Date: If an exit assessment code (09 - 18) is entered, the date of exit is required.

Outcome Codes (1B, 2B, 3B) - Exit codes: Report to what extent the child shows age-appropriate functioning, across a variety of settings and situations. These are required fields. If these fields are populated, you must enter an exit date.

Upon Exit Were New Skills Acquired: Indicate whether the child has acquired new skills or behaviors in the associated area (1A, 2A, 3A). If these fields are populated, you MUST enter an exit assessment date.

*An alternate, web-accessible program is available for entry as well. Please consult your Technology Department to determine if this product is available on your system.

Page 51: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 47

SR.301MC – Input Migrant Curriculum Information The following screen is currently only accessible via the SR.301ME (Migrant Education) maintenance program. Student ID and Student Name are ‘display only’ in this screen and cannot be changed.

CMTSMS Input Migrant Curriculum Information......CMT Ref: SR.301MC.11

Student: 000003818 KOLKA, AMY R.

-----------COURSE INFORMATION------------ Grade

St St Local Local St St Trm Academic Clock to Final Crs Crdts

Sbj ID ID Title Typ Sec Typ Year Hours Dat Grd Sts Grntd

02 156 COM200 COMP BASIC 03 02 0828 10 - 11 57.00 A C CP 1.00

01 008 ENG1A ENGLISH 1A 02 01 0828 10 - 11 46.00 B B OE ____

02 001 MTH 07 MATH 07 01 01 0828 10 - 11 39.00 C C CP 1.00

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

State Subject and State ID: These codes are maintained in SR.161 and when selected from the F4 index feature, both fields will be filled. Local ID and Local Title: When using the F4 key to access a list of valid courses, both fields will be filled. State Type: Enter the Course Type Code. You may use the F4 index to select from a code being maintained in the SR.162 file. State Section: The Section Code is maintained in the SR.163 file. You may select the appropriate code using the F4 index. Term Type: Select the Term Type (semester, trimester, etc.). You may use the F4 index to select from a predefined list in SR.165. Academic Year: Enter the academic year in which the student last attended the course. Clock Hours: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the number of clock hours to date that the student has completed; must be a number with a range between 0.00 to 1080.00. Grade to Date: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the grade the student has at the time of withdrawal. Final Grade: This is a ‘free form’ text field. If this is null, there must be a valid value in the Grade to Date field. Course Status: Enter the completion status of the course. Credits Granted: Credits granted to the student for completing a given course or a section of a course. (For example: 1.0, .50, .33, .25, etc.)

Page 52: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 48

SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs – Students Not in CIMS Use SR.301IM to maintain information for MSDS reporting for non-CIMS students. After selecting the student through the Index, two maintenance screens are presented. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMT Ref: SR.301IM.11

Personal Core

Name (FML): MATILDA MARY WALTZING__________

Name Suffix:___ UIC Number: 4567891230 Gender. . . . : F

Date of Birth: 11/21/1992 Birth City: SAGINAW, MI____ Mult Birth Ord: 1

Submitting Entity

Submitting Entity: 70350 Submitting Entity Type: _

Entity Demographics

Operating ISD #: 29 Operating Dist # . : 37010 School/facility: 03319

Grade Level . : 09 Date of Enrollment : 9/02/2008 Enrollment Type: _

Exit Status . : 19 Exit Date . . . . : 0/00/0000 Exit Type . . : _

Count Date: 9/30/2009 Student Residency. : 04

Personal Demographics

Resident LEA # : 70350 Resident County: . :02

Country of Birth: __ Year of Entry: . . :____

Street Addr: 1951 MAIN STREET____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

Cty: NOWHERESVILLE St MI Zip 48858 - ____

American Indian or Alaska Nat: 0 Asian American . . . . . . . : 0

Black or African American . : 0 Native Hawaiian or Pacific Is: 0

White . . . . . . . . . . . : 1 Hispanic or Latino . . . . . : 0

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Upon pressing <Enter> from the initial screen, a secondary maintenance screen is displayed where additional data is maintained. To access various records, enter ‘Y’ in the appropriate field. To avoid accessing particular records, simply change the flag to ‘N’ – the record is kept on file, just not viewed. To delete a record for a student, enter D in the corresponding field. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMT Ref: SR.301IM.12

Stu ID: 1887___________ Name: MATILDA______ WALTZING___________________

FTE

10/30 Day Rule: N FTE in General Ed: 1.00

Section 52 FTE: ____ Section 53 FTE . : ____

Attendance Days Attended: 016 Total Days Possible: 017

SNE Supplemental Nutrition Eligibility: 1 (Spring/EOY ONLY Report New Students)

Go To Sp Ed to Enter Initial IEP? N (Y/N/D) Go To Discipline Screen? N (Y/N/D)

Program Participation Y/N/D

Title I . . . . : N Special Education : Y Advanced & Accelerated: N

LEP . . . . . . : Y Migrant Education : N Adult Education . . . : N

Section 504 . . : N Alternative Ed . . : N Dev./Ret. Kindergarten: N

Out-of-State . . : N 21st Century CLC Pg: N International Student : N

Immigrant Student: N Personal Curriculum: N Early/Middle College : N

ECSpED Assessment: N Seat Time Waiver . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Personal Curriculum

Credit Modification Subject Areas: 1 2 3 4 __ __ __ __ Reason: 1

Homeless Homeless Student: __ Unaccompanied Youth: _

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Note! The bug of the middle name being duplicated from the previous student when adding students has been fixed.

Page 53: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 49

SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs – Students Not in CIMS (cont’d) The following screen is currently only accessible via the SR.301IM program when you enter ‘Y’ to ‘Go To Discipline Screen’. Student ID and Student Name are ‘display only’ in this screen and cannot be changed.

CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMTRef: SR.301IM.11

Stu ID: Name: AARON AAATEST

Line 1 Discipline Incident/Line 2 Discipline Consequence

________________ 09/25/2011 Typ: 56 Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: 1 Start of Action: 09/25/2011 Length: 1.00 Follow-up: 20 __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

________________ 00/00/0000 Typ: __ Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: ______ Follow-up: __ __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

________________ 00/00/0000 Typ: __ Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: ______ Follow-up: __ __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Incident ID: This is assigned to the incident by the local district. It is used to track both incidents and student consequences. Each incident must have a unique Incident ID within the Operating District and School Facility Number for the date and type of incident. Date of Incident: The date used in this field is the day the incident that led to the disciplinary action occurred. Entered as mm/dd/yyyy. Incident Type: The primary and most recent reason that led to the disciplinary action. Serious Bodily Injury: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence with injury and the injury inflicted meets the definition of Serious Bodily Injury per the United States Code paragraph (3) of subsection (h) of section 1365 of title 18: (3) The term serious bodily injury means bodily injury which involves:

(A) a substantial risk of death; (B) extreme physical pain; (C) protracted and obvious disfigurement; or (D) protracted loss or impairment of the function of a bodily member, organ, or mental

faculty. Sexual Assault: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved oral, anal, or vaginal penetration forcibly or against the person's will or where the victim is incapable of giving consent. Includes rape, fondling, indecent liberties, child molestation, and sodomy. Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident.

Page 54: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 50

SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs – Students Not in CIMS (cont’d) Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments. Follow-up: Enter the follow-up and/or educational services provided to the student. If more than one action/service occurred, report the primary education service or referral first. Additional codes may be reported as needed. Secondary Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident. Secondary Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Secondary Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments. Other Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident. Other Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Other Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments.

Page 55: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 51

MSD.310 – Input Early Childhood Information (non-CIMS students) Early Childhood information may be maintained in the MSD.310 maintenance program, which is accessible only through the SR.301IM file and selecting the Early Childhood record. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: MSD.310 .01

A Student No. ______2505 Start Date 110808 Program __

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup Index: 2

Index 1 = Student Early Childhood File

End 2 = Name (L/F) CIMS Student File

3 = CIMS Student File

Auto Next Record? N

Enter the Program Start Date in MMDDYY format and the Program code for the student. CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: MSD.310.11

CIMS File Id: 000002505

Student Name: GEORGE M BAILEY

Early Childhood

Program: _1

Start Date: 09/06/07

Delivery Method: 2

Delivery Schedule: 1

County of Residence: 5

Funding Type: 01

Exit/Completion Reason : ___

Date Exited or Completed: 00/00/0000

Number of Hours Per Session: ____

Number of Days Per Week Receiving Services: _

County of Residence: _3

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Note! It is recommended that you reference the Michigan Department of Education's manual for the Single Record Student Data, as well as the schemas for the MSDS submissions for a detailed explanation of each field.

Page 56: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 52

MSD.320 – Input Migrant Curriculum Information (non-CIMS students) Migrant Curriculum information may be maintained in the MSD.310 maintenance program, which is accessible only through the SR.301IM file and selecting the Early Childhood record. Student ID and Student Name are ‘display only’ in this screen and cannot be changed.

CMTSMS Input Single Record Basic Information.....CMT Ref: MSD.320.11

Student: 000001492 COLUMBUS, KRISTOFERR

-----------COURSE INFORMATION------------ Grade

St St Local Local St St Trm Academic Clock to Final Crs Crdts

Sbj ID ID Title Typ Sec Typ Year Hours Dat Grd Sts Grntd

02 156 COM200 COMP BASIC 03 02 0828 10 - 11 62.00 A A CP 1.00

01 008 ENG 08 ENGLISH 8_ 02 01 0828 10 - 11 62.00 A A CP 1.00

02 001 MTH 08 MATH 08 01 01 0828 10 - 11 62.00 A A CP 1.00

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

__ ___ ______ ___________ __ __ ____ __ - __ _____ _ _ __ ____

State Subject and State ID: These codes are maintained in SR.161 and when selected from the F4 index feature, both fields will be filled. Local ID and Local Title: When using the F4 key to access a list of valid courses, both fields will be filled. State Type: Enter the Course Type Code. You may use the F4 index to select from a code being maintained in the SR.162 file. State Section: The Section Code is maintained in the SR.163 file; you may select the appropriate code using the F4 index. Term Type: Select the Term Type (semester, trimester, etc.). You may use the F4 index to select from a predefined list in SR.165. Academic Year: Enter the academic year in which the student last attended the course. Clock Hours: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the number of clock hours to date that the student has completed; must be a number with a range between 0.00 to 1080.00. Grade to Date: For courses that have NOT been completed (or credit granted), enter the grade the student has at the time of withdrawal. Final Grade: This is a ‘free form’ text field. If this is null, there must be a valid value in the Grade to Date field. Credits Granted: Credits granted to the student for completing a given course or a section of a course. (For example 1.0, .50, .33, .25, etc.)

Page 57: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 53

SRSD02 - PROGRAMS FOR IMPORTING RECORDS INTO SRSD

This menu contains import/upload programs to pull data from external databases, as well as the SR.301IM file to maintain imported data on the iSeries.

SR.301IM – Maintain SRSD Recs – Students Not in CIMS Please refer to this section within MSDS02 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Records.

SR.510 – Import SRSD Files to CIMS Files The SR.510 program - Import SRSD Files to CIMS Files, allows you to take an exported file from STUREC or MICIS that has been uploaded to the AS/400 and create the records in CIMS. After saving the file to the IFS, you are then able to run the SR.510 program. If you are importing files for more than one program, you’ll need to run this program once for each file you want to import. For example, once for Special Ed and once for Adult Ed. Note! When you are exporting your student data from STUREC or VEDS, create your export file in text only format. The programs will not correctly report files in the comma-delimited format. Since some programs have multiple exports, make sure you use the export in the SRSD layout. Depending on how the fields are answered under Import Options and Update Options, the program will either create records in SR.301IM or in CIMS.

CMTSMS Import SRSD files to CIMS Files...........CMT Ref: SR.510P.01

Is the file being imported from Fall/Spring/Eoy Collection? S (F/S/E)

Enter IFS Full Path of Where the MSDS XML file is located. MUST BE ON THE IFS!

Path Name: ___________________________________________________________________

Example: /CMT/MSDS/IMPORT/DATA_11111.XML File Being Imprtd: R

Match by UIC or ID/Last Name, First Name, DOB/Both? N (U/I/N/B) S = STUREC

Limit to: Operating LEA: _____ R = RMS/MICIS

School Code: _____

--------------IMPORT OPTIONS-------------------------

Import selected students to SR301IM only? N (Y/N)

Update SR301IM file? Y N will not update IM file

--------------UPDATE OPTIONS-------------------------

Update Files? N (Y/N) N will print the edit report only

Replace Data? N (Y/N) N will add new records only (Including FTE's)

Y will add new records & update existing records

Compare with Suffix? N (Y/N) Y will compare names using suffix

------FTE OPTIONS FOR SPECIAL ED STUDENTS--------(leave all N for no updates)-

Update Both Gen & Sp Ed FTE on Regist.? N (Y/N) Dflt IEP Result Date: 0/00/00

Update Sp Ed FTE Only: N (Y/N) Recalc Gen Ed FTE based on Sp Ed FTE? N (Y/N)

Each import option will update only the fields required for State Reporting. The STUREC import will update or add all fields on the Adult Education screen in SR.301AE for students in CIMS or SR.301IM* for students not in CIMS.

Page 58: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 54

SR.510 – Import SRSD Files to CIMS Files (cont’d)

The RMS/MICIS import will update or add the fields on the Special Education screen in SR.301SE for students in CIMS or SR.301IM* for students not in CIMS. Always enter ‘Y’ in the Update FTEs on the Registration Screen. Note! If you have imported records into SR.301IM, it is necessary to run SR.430 to populate the ‘Count Date’ field in the SR.301IM file. Otherwise, it is possible for the student’s age to be calculated incorrectly. If the import is to be limited to a specific Operating LEA and/or School Code, enter this also. Leave it blank to import the entire file. Import selected students to SR301IM only? Entering ‘Y’ will create a record for the student within SR.301IM - Maintain SRSD Records-

Students not in CIMS. Entering ‘N’ will cause the program to attempt to match the student’s ID found in the imported

file to the student IDs found in CIMS. The program will first try to match the student ID for left and right justification within the State’s 20-character field (the Student ID will not be pulled from the middle of the field). If it does not find a match, the program will continue to match by last name, first name, birthdate and suffix. When a match is found, the appropriate record is created in CIMS (i.e. a record from RMS will create a record in SR.301SE). If a match is not found in CIMS (and the Update SR301IM File? field is set to ‘Y’), a record will then be created in SR.301IM.

Update SR301IM File? Enter ‘Y’ in this field to update the SR301IM file. If the Imported to SR301IM only? field is

answered with ‘N’, however, only those students whose records were not found in CIMS will be added to the SR.301IM file.

Enter ‘N’ if you do not wish to update. If the Imported to SR301IM only? field is also

answered with ‘N’, then no records will be added to the IM file at all. Only CIMS records will be created.

Update Files? Enter ‘Y’ if you want to import the records from the specified file into either the SR.301IM or

into CIMS (depending on the way previous fields were answered). Enter ‘N’ to only print the edit reports – nothing will be created or updated. Note! Regardless of how the field is completed, two reports will be generated. One will show a list of the students that were not found in CIMS and were either added or their record was updated. The second report lists students who were imported into the MSDS records and whether the record was added or updated.

Page 59: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 55

SR.510 – Import SRSD Files to CIMS Files (cont’d) Replace Data? Enter ‘Y’ to this option if you want to add records that do not exist and update those records

that have already been created for the student in the SRSD/CIMS files. Enter ‘N’ any records that are already on file will not be updated whether there are changes to

be made to the records or not. Compare with Suffix? Enter ‘Y’ in this field if you want the program to consider suffixes when matching imported files.

Otherwise, enter ‘N’. Update Both Gen & Sp Ed on Regist? Prompting this field with ‘Y’ will cause the program to

pull the FTE information directly from the file being imported and updating the FF220 field in the Student Registration screen.

Update Sp Ed FTE Only? Entering ‘Y’ in this field will ONLY update the Special Ed FTE in the

Student Registration screen. Any existing General Ed FTE will remain the same. Recalc Gen Ed FTE based on Sp Ed FTE? Entering ‘Y’ in this field will cause the program to

recalculate only the General Ed FTE in the student file, based on the Special Ed FTE being brought in from the Import file.

Dflt Date of IEP Result This is a required field when importing an RMS/MICIS record for Special Ed. The date entered here will be defaulted in the SR.301RF file as shown below: CMTSMS Input Special Ed Referral Information.....CMT Ref: SR.301RF.11

IEP Timeline Days Agreed Upon _30 Timeliness of Initial IEP...: 11

MM DD CCYY

Parent Perm Rec..... 9 15 2009 Result of Initial IEP........ 1

Ref. Result Received 10 2 2009 Parent Refused Services...... N

IEP Plcmnt/Implement 10 2 2009 Disability 5 Pgm Serv Code 140

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

Mode: Add F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel Cancel? N

It is important to note that if an error is made during the running of SR.510 (records imported into the incorrect file, for example), it is possible for you to delete these records through the use of SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs & Remove Data. You may also wish to run SR.290 to clear any existing data from the previous submission prior to importing any new data.

Page 60: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 56

SR.721 (SR.721N-Next Year) – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML File for V2 MSDS The SR.721 will extract data from student files stored in CIMS and create either a UIC upload or an Early Roster file in XML format that is written to the IFS of the iSeries. The files created in the IFS are RequestforUIC2009_10_70350.xml or EarlyRoster2009_10_70350.xml. District: Enter the district ID you would like to create the file for or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid district codes. To include all districts within the MSD.200 file, leave the district blank. If district is left blank, validation of the remaining fields may not be performed correctly. Submitting Entity: Enter a valid one (1) character Submitting Entity code to include in the file or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid codes. Submitting Entity Code: Enter the five (5) digit state assigned code to include in the file. Build Early Roster or UIC?: Enter R for Early Roster or U to build the UIC file. CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

District: ASD ()

Submitting Entity: D ()

Submitting Entity Code: 70350___ ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

Upon pressing <Enter>, additional UIC file parameters will become available: CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

Select:

District: ASD

Submitting Entity: D

Submitting Entity Code: 70350

Only Download students without UIC codes? Y

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Check the Bypass School/Class file (SR.240)? Y (Y/N)

Limit to:

School: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

and/or Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

or Students: __________ __________ __________ _________ ()

__________ __________ __________ _________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

Only Download students without UIC codes?: The default setting for this field is Y and the file will only include those students who do not have a UIC number. Append Records to the End of the File?: Enter Y in this field if you wish to add records in the current build of the file to the existing records in the file. Check the Bypass School/Class file?: If this is answered Y, the SR.240 Bypass file is referenced and students who are enrolled in any of the bypassed schools or classes will not be included in the file.

Page 61: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 57

SR.721 (SR.721N-Next Year) – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML File for V2 MSDS (cont’d) If the Early Roster file is being built rather than the UIC file, two additional screen options are available. CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

District: ASD ()

Submitting Entity: D ()

Submitting Entity Code: 70350 ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

Download Current Students NOT Reported in: Enter a library and file (and member if applicable) where the previous General Collection (for End-of-Year) is stored on the iSeries. The SR.721 will only include students in the Early Roster file that were not included at the last End of Year submission.

Download Students with an Original Enrollment Date on or after: Only students with an enrollment record in the current school year on or after this date will be included in the Early Roster file.

CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

Select:

District: ASD

Submitting Entity: D

Submitting Entity Code: 70350

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Check the Bypass School/Class file (SR.240)? Y

Do you want to send the OEAA Component? N (Y/N)

Limit to: Library File Member

Download Current Students NOT Reported in SMSFILES SR301SUB ___________

Download Students with an Original Enrollment Date on or after 07/01/09

School: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

and/or Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

or Students: _________ _________ _________ _________ ()

_________ _________ _________ _________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

The remaining ‘Limit to’ fields allow you to limit the build of the Early Roster file to a school(s), Class(es), Tag(s) or Students.

Page 62: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 58

SR.721 (SR.721N-Next Year) – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML File for V2 MSDS (cont’d) CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.11

E N T E R S E L E C T I O N S

For the MSDS OEAA Assessment Component

Valid Test Type Codes: 01 MEAP, 02 MEAP Access, 03 MI Access(FI),

04 MI Access(SI), 05 MI Access(P)

Valid Research Codes: 01-10

Math Science

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Reading Social Studies

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Writing ELA

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

SR.730 – Import 132 Char UIC File From MSDS>SR301U After saving the State UIC file on your iSeries, use SR.730 to import the non-SRSD (132-byte) UIC records that are returned to you from the State. This program will import UIC numbers for CIMS files only.

CMTSMS Import UIC's in XML format MSDS>SR301U CMT Ref: SR.730P.01

Enter AS400 File Name and Library Name Where Uploaded PC UIC# File is Located.

File Name: __________ Library Name: __________ Member Name: ___________

OR

Path Name: \cmt\MSDS\EXPORT\70350_______________________________________________

Update Files? Y(Y/N)

N will print the edit report only

Replace Data? 2 (1/2)

1 will update UIC#s for all students

2 will add UIC#s for students without a UIC#

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

File Name, Library Name and Member Name: Indicate where the file has been stored on the AS/400. Update Files?: You have the option to ‘Update’ the file or simply print a report indicating which students will be updated. Replace Data?: Option 1 will go through and add UIC numbers for those students with a blank UIC and update any that have changed. Option 2 will only add those for the students with a blank UIC.

Note! THIS PROGRAM MUST BE RUN ON A DEDICATED SYSTEM!

Page 63: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 59

SR.741 – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML V2 MSDS - SR301IM For those clients that maintain student data on a permanent basis, the SR.740 will extract student information from the SR.301IM file and create either a UIC upload or an Early Roster file in XML format that is written to the IFS of the iSeries. The files created in the IFS are RequestforUIC2009_10_70350.xml or EarlyRoster2009_10_70350.xml. Submitting Entity Code: Enter the five (5) digit state assigned code to include in the file. Submitting Entity: Enter a valid one (1) character Submitting Entity code to include in the file or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid codes. Build Early Roster or UIC: Enter R for Early Roster or U to build the UIC file.

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

After pressing <Enter>, additional ‘Limit to’ fields are presented. Enter the School(s), Class(es) you wish to include or omit, if any. Only Download students without UIC codes?: The default setting for this field is Y and the file will only include those students who do not have a UIC number. Append Records to the End of the File?: Enter Y in this field if you wish to add records in the current build of the file to the existing records in the file.

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

Select: District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

Only Download students without UIC codes? Y

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Limit to:

School: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ () Include/Omit? I

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

In the ‘Limit to’ section of the screen, you may enter any schools or class levels to be Included or Omitted from the build of the file.

Page 64: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 60

SR.741 – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML V2 MSDS - SR301IM (cont’d)

If the Early Roster file is being built rather than the UIC file, two additional screen options are available. CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

Download Current Students NOT Reported in: Enter a library and file (and member if applicable) where the previous General Collection (for End-of-Year) is stored on the AS/400. The SR.721 will only include students in the Early Roster file that were not included at the last End of Year submission.

Download Students with an Enrollment Date on or after: Only students with an enrollment record in the current school year on or after this date will be included in the Early Roster file.

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.0

Select: District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Do you want to send the OEAA Component? N (Y/N)

Limit to: Library File Member

Download Current Students NOT Reported in SMSFILES SR301SUB ____________

Download Students with an Enrollment Date on or after 07/01/09

School: _____ _____ _____ _____ () Include/Omit? I

_____ _____ _____ _____

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

The remaining ‘Limit to’ fields allow you to limit the build of the Early Roster file to a school(s), Class(es), Tag(s) or Students.

Page 65: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 61

SR.741 – Create UIC/Erly Rstr XML V2 MSDS - SR301IM (cont’d)

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.11

E N T E R S E L E C T I O N S

For the MSDS OEAA Assessment Component

For the MSDS OEAA Assessment Component

Valid Test Type Codes: 01 MEAP, 02 MEAP Access, 03 MI Access(FI),

04 MI Access(SI), 05 MI Access(P)

Valid Research Codes: 01-10

Math Science

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Reading Social Studies

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Writing ELA

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

SR.750 – Import 132 Char UIC File From MSDS>SR301IM

After saving the State UIC file on your AS/400, use SR.750 to import the non-SRSD (132-byte) UIC file returned from the State into your SR.301IM records. This program updates the SR.301IM file only and will not update the UIC field in the student’s Basic Record in CIMS.

CMTSMS Import Non-CIMS Stu UIC's to SR301IM. . . CMT Ref: SR.750P.01

Enter AS400 File Name and Library Name Where Uploaded PC UIC# File is Located.

File Name: 70350UIC_ Library Name: SMSFILES Member Name: ZPS__00

OR

Path Name: \cmt\MSDS\EXPORT\70350

Update Files? N (Y/N)

N will print the edit report only

Replace Data? 2 (1/2)

1 will update UIC#s for all students

2 will add UIC#s for students without a UIC#

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

File Name, Library Name and Member Name: Indicate where the file has been stored on the AS/400.

Update Files?: You have the option to ‘Update’ the file or simply print a report indicating which students will be updated.

Replace Data?: Option 1 will go through and add UIC numbers for those students with a blank UIC and update any that have changed. Option 2 will only add those for the students with a blank UIC.

Note! IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THIS PROGRAM BE RUN ON A DEDICATED SYSTEM!

Page 66: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 62

SR.520 – Create CIMS Student Records from SRSD This program can be used to create a basic record for students within CIMS when exported from another source (i.e. Special Ed students from RMS that are not currently within CIMS). The file must first be uploaded to the AS/400. The file can be any name and saved within any library on the system. CMTSMS Create CIMS Student Records from SRSD.....CMT Ref: SR.520P.01

Enter AS400 File Name and Library Name Where Uploaded PC SRSD File is Located.

Member Name:ZPS__00 File Name:TESTFILE Library Name: AK_________

Create CIMS Records for:

District . . : ASD

School . . . : AJH

Limit to:

Operating LEA: 70350 (Only this LEA and School will be

School Code : 04622 processed from the incoming file.)

Update Files? N (Y/N)

N will print the edit report only

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Member Name, File Name and Library Name: Indicate where the file has been stored on the AS/400. You must specify the member, file and library name. District and School: Enter the District and School into which the records are to be created. The District and School that you specify must already exist within CIMS. Operating LEA and School Code: To limit the creation of records for only a particular Operating LEA and the School, enter the appropriate codes that you wish to limit to. If you leave it blank, it will create a CIMS record for all those in the file. Update Files? If you only want to print a report of the records that will be created, leave the default ‘N’ in the Update Files? field. Otherwise enter ‘Y’. The records will be created and a report will print.

Page 67: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 63

SRSD03 – PROGRAMS FOR CREATING STATE DOWNLOAD FILE

The SRSD03 menu contains the programs used for creating and maintaining the files for the State.

SR.580 – Clear Files Before Starting New Submission This program will clear only SR.301 (be sure a backup has been done using SR.570), and can be used before you run SR.500 to start a new submission. This will ensure all records will be cleared out on a new submission when a client has two schools reporting to a single school code. The ‘Clear Files?’ option has now also been incorporated within the SR.500 program.

SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD This program will only need to be run as part of the process to build your MSDS General Collection files for Fall, Spring and End of Year and can be run as many times as needed to create records in SR.301 and update the SR.301B record. It will also perform the SR.560 function of converting the data to a flat text file in SR301MI. This has been modified that if the Initial IEP code is 11, 12, 18, 19, 20 or 21, then the days beyond timeline in SR.301 should be blank. CMTSMS Build MSDS General Collection for SR.301..CMT Ref: SR.500 .01

District: ASD

Limit to:

School: ___ (be sure school is not entered in SR.240)

Exclude Tags: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Report Options:

Report (Fall/Spring/EOY): S (F/S/E)

Clear SR301 File? Y

Calculate Days Beyond Timeline? Y

Get Phone Number from Student Phone? N (N-Will use Resides with Fmly Ph#)

Seat Time Waiver Tag: STW

District: Enter the CIMS District ID for which the download file is being created. Submitting Entity: Select the appropriate code. Generally this field will be set to D for District. Submitting Entity Code: Enter the state ID code for your district. School: Enter the CIMS School ID in this field, if running by school. Schools entered in program SR.240 – Maintain Schools to Bypass for Reporting will not be downloaded. Exclude Tags: You may enter up to six (6) tags for students you wish to exclude. Any students assigned these tags will not have new SR.301B or SR.301 files built.

Page 68: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 64

SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD (cont’d) Report (Fall/Spring/EOY): Enter the appropriate code for the submission the download is being created for (F=Fall; S=Spring; E=End of Year). All fields will be downloaded for all reporting cycles. Clear SR301 File?: Entering ‘Y’ in this field will clear the SR301 files prior to creating new SR.301 records. Note that ALL records in SR.301 will be cleared if ‘Y’ is entered, not just the records for the district and school entered. A switch setting is available in ACS.310 to set the default for this field. Calculate Days Beyond Timeline?: For districts using CMT’s Special Ed software package, enter ‘Y’ in this field. If you import your Special Ed records from MICIS or another source, enter ‘N’. A switch is available in ACS.310 to change the default value. Get Student Phone Number From Student Phone?: Enter ‘N’ in this field to have the program look for a Family Phone number first; if no Family number is found, it will use a Student Phone number if found. Enter ‘Y’ in this field to have it look for a Student Phone number first. Seat Time Waiver Tag: Enter the tag code you established in STU.280 to track those students who are receiving instruction for three or more courses through a virtual education program. Count Date: This date is defaulted from SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates. The date can be changed by typing over the date that is defaulted. Enter the Count Date for the Fall or Spring submission or the last day of school for the End of Year submission. Previous Fall Count Date: The date of the previous FALL submission is automatically displayed according to the date established in SR.260. This is only required when running the report for the Spring submission. Previous Spring Count Date: The date of the previous SPRING submission is automatically displayed according to the date established in SR.260. This is only required when running the report for the EOY submission. Previous EOY Count Date: The last day of school for the previous school year is automatically displayed. This is only required for the report for the Fall submission.

Page 69: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 65

SR.550 - Merge CIMS/Imported Records to Build Download File This program will merge the data from SR.301IM into SR.301. You only need to run this program if you use SR.301IM for any reason. After this program completes, data may be maintained in the following ways: 1) Use SR.301IM and rerun SR.550 when the data is ready to be downloaded again. 2) Use SR.301 to maintain all SRSD data.

Keep in mind that changes made in SR.301 will not update data in SR.301IM, and any data changed using only SR.301 will be replaced if SR.500 is rerun.

This program can be run as many times as needed. When run, it removes all of the records from file SR301 for the criteria you have entered and the records are re-added. CMTSMS Merge CIMS/Imprtd Recs to Bld DWN File....CMT Ref: SR.550 .01

Operating LEA: ________

Limit to:

Administrative Unit: ________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Operating LEA: Enter the Operating District LEA for which the download file is being created. Administrative Unit: If the download is run for an individual school, enter the State Administrative Unit ID in this field. If you wish to run the download for the entire district, leave this field blank.

Page 70: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 66

SR.301 - Maintain ALL SRSD Information After SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD, this program can be used to maintain data included in the file that will be submitted to the State.

Keep in mind that changes made in SR.301 will not update data in any other program, and any data changed using only SR.301 will be replaced if SR.500 is rerun.

CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMT Ref: SR.301 .11

Personal Core

Name (FML): MATILDA MARY WALTZING__________

Name Suffix:___ UIC Number: 4567891230 Gender. . . . : F

Date of Birth: 11/21/1992 Birth City: SAGINAW, MI____ Mult Birth Ord: 1

Submitting Entity

Submitting Entity: 70350 Submitting Entity Type: _

School Demographics

Operating ISD #: 29 Operating Dist # . : 37010 School/facility: 03319

Grade Level . : 09 Date of Enrollment : 9/02/2008 Enrollment Type: _

Exit Status . : 19 Exit Date . . . . : 0/00/0000 Exit Type . . : _

Count Date: 9/30/2009 Student Residency. : 04 S2E2Code . . . : _____

Personal Demographics

Resident LEA # : 70350 Resident County: . :02 Phone: __________

Country of Birth: __ Year of Entry: . . :____

Street Addr: 1951 MAIN STREET____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

Cty: NOWHERESVILLE St MI Zip 48858 - ____

American Indian or Alaska Nat: 0 Asian American . . . . . . . : 0

Black or African American . : 0 Native Hawaiian or Pacific Is: 0

White . . . . . . . . . . . : 1 Hispanic or Latino . . . . . : 0

Upon pressing <Enter> from the initial screen, a secondary maintenance screen is displayed where additional data is maintained. To access various records, enter ‘Y’ in the appropriate field. To avoid accessing particular records, simply change the flag to ‘N’ – the record is kept on file, just not viewed. To delete a record for a student, enter D in the corresponding field. For SR.301IM, please refer to MSDS02 – Programs for Maintaining MSDS Records - the program screens are identical.

CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMT Ref: SR.301 .12

Stu ID: 1887___________ Name: MATILDA______ WALTZING___________________

FTE

10/30 Day Rule: N FTE in General Ed: 1.00

Section 52 FTE: ____ Section 53 FTE . : ____

Attendance Days Attended: 016 Total Days Possible: 017

SNE Supplemental Nutrition Eligibility: 1 (Spring/EOY ONLY Report New Students)

Go To Sp Ed to Enter Initial IEP? N (Y/N/D) Go To Discipline Screen? N (Y/N/D)

Program Participation Y/N/D

Title I . . . . : N Special Education : Y Advanced & Accelerated: N

LEP . . . . . . : Y Migrant Education : N Adult Education . . . : N

Section 504 . . : N Alternative Ed . . : N Dev./Ret. Kindergarten: N

Out-of-State . . : N 21st Century CLC Pg: N International Student : N

Immigrant Student: N Personal Curriculum: N Early/Middle College : N

ECSpED Assessment: N Seat Time Waiver . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Future Use . . . : N Future Use . . . . : N Future Use . . . . . : N

Personal Curriculum

Credit Modification Subject Areas: 1 2 3 4 __ __ __ __ Reason: 1

Homeless Homeless Student: __ Unaccompanied Youth: _

Page 71: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 67

SR.301 - Maintain ALL SRSD Information (cont’d) The following screen is currently only accessible via the SR.301 program when you enter ‘Y’ to ‘Go To Discipline Screen’. Student ID and Student Name are ‘display only’ in this screen and cannot be changed.

CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Recs- Students not in CIMS..CMTRef: SR.301.11

Stu ID: Name: AARON AAATEST

Line 1 Discipline Incident/Line 2 Discipline Consequence

________________ 09/25/2011 Typ: 56 Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: 1 Start of Action: 09/25/2011 Length: 1.00 Follow-up: 20 __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

________________ 00/00/0000 Typ: __ Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: ______ Follow-up: __ __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

________________ 00/00/0000 Typ: __ Serious Bodily Injury: _ Sexual Assault: _

Action: Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: ______ Follow-up: __ __ __

Secondary Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Other Action: __ Start of Action: 00/00/0000 Length: _______

Incident ID: This is assigned to the incident by the local district and is used to track both incidents and student consequences. Each incident must have a unique Incident ID within the Operating District and School Facility Number for the date and type of incident. Date of Incident: The date used in this field is the day the incident that led to the disciplinary action occurred. Entered as mm/dd/yyyy. Incident Type: Enter the code for the primary and most recent reason that led to the disciplinary action. Serious Bodily Injury: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence with injury and the injury inflicted meets the definition of Serious Bodily Injury per the United States Code paragraph (3) of subsection (h) of section 1365 of title 18:

(3) The term serious bodily injury means bodily injury which involves: (A) a substantial risk of death; (B) extreme physical pain; (C) protracted and obvious disfigurement; or (D) protracted loss or impairment of the function of a bodily member, organ, or mental

faculty. Sexual Assault: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, indicate if the Incident Type involved oral, anal, or vaginal penetration forcibly or against the person's will or where the victim is incapable of giving consent. Includes rape, fondling, indecent liberties, child molestation, and sodomy. Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident.

Page 72: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 68

SR.301 - Maintain ALL SRSD Information (cont’d) Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments. Follow-up: Enter the follow-up and/or educational services provided to the student. If more than one action/service occurred, report the primary education service or referral first. Additional codes may be reported as needed. Secondary Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident. Secondary Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Secondary Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments. Other Action: Type of disciplinary action taken as a consequence of the incident reported in the Disciplinary Incident. Other Start of Action: Enter the date on which the student began the consequence reported in Disciplinary Action. Note! This is not the date the consequence was assigned but the first day the student began serving the consequence. Other Length: Enter the number of days assigned for the consequence in half-day increments.

Page 73: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 69

SR.570 - Create a Backup of Your Submission This program must be executed after your district has passed the State’s edit program. The backup created by this program will be used for both audit purposes and comparing files from one submission to the other. If you forget to execute this program, your next submission may be incorrect. Also note if you run this program more than once for the same reporting period and LEA, you will delete your original backup. CMTSMS Create a Backup of your Submission........CMT Ref: SR.570 .01

Operating LEA: _________

Backup for Fall/Spring/EOY/All Report: _ (F/S/E)

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Enter the code for the submission the backup is being created for (F=Fall; S=Spring; E=End of Year). Each time you run this program a new member will be created for file SR301SUB in SMSFILES. The first character of the member name consists of the submission backed up (F=Fall, S=Spring, E=End of Year), the second and third digits indicate the year the backup is for (i.e. 01 is 2001), and the last five (5) digits are the LEA number.

Work with Members Using PDM SAGINAW

File . . . . . . SR301SUB

Library . . . . SMSFILES Position to . . . . .

Opt Member Date Text

___ E0150365 02/05/04

F0100000 01/24/04

F0150000 02/04/04

F0150365 02/04/04

F0170350 02/05/04

F0173255 02/04/04

S0150000 02/05/04

Page 74: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 70

SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs and Remove Data This program was developed for clients who would like to remove SRSD data in the SR.301B and associated program screens, or data from the SR.301IM file. You can limit the program to a district and school or leave them blank for all districts and schools. Select the programs and associated files you would like to remove by placing “Y” in the field next to the program. To remove all records from the Special Ed file (SR.301SE), the Special Ed Referral file (SR.301RF), Early Childhood (SR.301EC), Early On (SR.301EI), LEP (SR.301BI) or Advanced and Accelerated (SR.301GT), simply add 999999 (without slashes) in the date fields associated with that program.

CMTSMS Remove Stu's from programs & remove data..CMT Ref: SR.290 .01

Limit to: District: ASD (leave blank for all)

School: AJH (leave blank for all)

Remove the students from the following programs and associated files:

mmddyy

Title I: N (Y/N) Sp Ed Exits prior to: 999999__

Migrant Education: N (Y/N) Sp Ed Ref Recd prior to: 999999__

Section 504: N (Y/N) Early Chld Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Career and Technical: N (Y/N) Early-On Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Adult Education: N (Y/N) LEP Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Adv/Acc End Dt prior to: 0/00/00

EC SpEd Asmt Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Clear data in the following fields:

At Risk: N (Y/N)

Imported students - (Remove the Selected Records or Data Below- - - - - - - -

IM Migrant Curr: N (Y/N) Exits prior to: 999999_

Sp Ed Exits prior to: 0/00/00 Discp Incd prior to: 0/00/00

Sp Ed Ref prior to: 0/00/00 EC Exits prior to: 0/00/00

LEP Exits prior to: 0/00/00 EC SpEd Asmt Exits prior to: 0/00/00

F1=HELP F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

If you select to remove the entire SR.301IM, leave the district and school blank and enter 999999 in the ‘Exits prior to’ field. This option will clear the all records, regardless of whether or not the students are still active in the district or have exited.

When removing exited students from the SR.301IM file, it is necessary to enter an exit date next to the program the students are enrolled in, along with an exit date.

Page 75: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 71

MSDS03 – Programs to Create MSDS State Download Files

MSD.200 – Maintain Districts to Include in MSDS Reporting Use this program to maintain the districts to be included in the MSDS file build. When District is left blank on the MSD.600 prompt screen, the program will include ALL districts in this file when the files are built. CMTSMS Maintain Dists to Include in MSD Reporting Ref: MSD.200 .01

A District ASD

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup Index: 1

Index 1 = Districts to Include File

End 2 = CIMS Districts

Auto Next Record? N

Enter a valid CIMS District code or use Index 2 to display valid Districts to select. CMTSMS Maintain Dists to Include in MSD Reporting Ref: MSD.200 .11

District to Include: ASD AMERICAN SCHOOL DISTRICT

Mode: Change F3=Exit F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 76: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 72

MSD.250 – Maintain Links to Completion Status It is necessary to report a Completion Status for each course submitted through the TSDL collection. Therefore, you’ll need to map each grade symbol used (by building) to the appropriate TSDL Completion Status code in MSD.250. Use the Index command and Index 2 on the main prompt screen to view the grade symbols on file. Select the grade symbols with ‘X’ and press <Enter>. SGS Index to Grade Symbols Ref: GRD.250X.02

Position to: District: ASD School: AJH Grade:

"X" Grade School District School Name

_ A AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

_ A+ AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

_ A- AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

X B AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

_ B+ AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

_ B- AJH ASD AMERICAN JUNIOR HIGH

After selecting the grade symbol and pressing <Enter>, the program returns to the main prompt screen, where you must now use the Add command and the <Enter> key. CMTSMS Maintain Links to Completion Status.......CMT Ref: MSD.250 .01

A Grade B School AJH District ASD

Add

Change

Delete

Lookup

Index Index: 1

End 1 = Completion Status Linked

2 = Grades

3 = Schools

4 = Districts

Select the grade symbol you wish to map and use the Add command to link it to the appropriate Completion Status code. Use the F4 Index feature to select from a listing of valid Completion Status codes. Press <Enter> to Save. CMTSMS Maintain Links to Completion Status.......CMT Ref: MSD.250 .11

District: ASD

School: AJH

Grade: B

Completion Status: CP

Mode: Add F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 77: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 73

MSD.330 – Maintain Course Extension Info for TSDL CIMS courses that will be submitted with the TSDL collection must be linked to state subject area and course identification codes. This linkage is made possible through the MSD.330 program. All courses currently in the SCH.310 – Course Definition file will be available for mapping through this program. District: Enter the CIMS District ID for which the download file is being created. Required! School: Enter the CIMS School ID in this field. Required! CMTSMS Maintain Course Extension Info for TSDL Ref: MSD.330 .01

District: ASD ()

School: AHS ()

Education Level: S

F3=Exit F4=Index Education Level: Valid entries for this field are S (secondary, 9th–12th) or E (elementary/pre-secondary, K–8th). This value will be defaulted in the next screen for all courses and determines which set of Subject Area and Course ID codes are accessible in the F4 Index feature. In the event an offered course is different than the majority, the Education Level field can be manually changed. (For example, a high school course that is offered at a middle school.)

CMTSMS Maintain Course Extension Info for Mich. Ref: MSD.330 .02

District: ASD School: AHS AMY'S H.S.

Position to Course#: COM200

Ed Subject Course Course Virtual CTE Sp.Ed.

Course# Subject Lvl Area ID Type Course Course Course

COM100 KEYBD BEG S 10 004 01 _ _ _

COM120 KEYBD INTER S 10 005 01 _ _ _

COM150 KEYBD ADV S 10 008 01 _ _ _

COM200 COMP BASIC S __ ___ __ _ _ _

COM220 COMP INTER S __ ___ __ _ _ _

COM250 COMP ADV S 10 201 03 Y _ _

ENG 07 ENGLISH 07 S __ ___ __ _ _ _

ENG 08 ENGLISH 08 S __ ___ __ _ _ _

More...

Note: The Ed Lvl (education level) will determine which F4 programs

are called. Use S for secondary and E for elementary.

Use Y to indicate virtual, CTE, and/or special education courses.

Enter=Save F3=Save and Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Virtual Course: Indicate virtual courses with ‘Y’. CTE Course and Sp. Ed. Course: These fields are currently not in use and do not require entry.

Page 78: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 74

MSD.620 - Build TSDL Download File The primary function of MSD.620 is similar to that of SR.500; it will create a ‘preliminary’ file build for the TSDL submission (which will later be converted to the xml format). The secondary function of this program is that it can be used to create course and grade records to be submitted in TSDL, for those students who do not have a schedule in SCH.410. Records created by the MSD.620 program are stored in maintenance file MSD.450. Records can then be viewed or maintained in MSD.450, but keep in mind that this file can be deleted and recreated many times. Therefore, maintenance in MSD.450 is strongly discouraged. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.01

District: ASD School: AJH Year: 11 Educational Level: _ (E/S)

State District: ___ State School: ___ (Used only for Option I)

Clear the TSDL Collection File? N (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: G

G=Current Grades

T=Transcripted Grades

A=Assign Now

I=Assign Now for SR301IM

Limit to:

Class: __ Class Required for Options A & I)

Homeroom Teacher: ______ (Only for Option A)

District: Enter the CIMS District ID for which the download file is being created. Required!

School: Enter the CIMS School ID in this field. Required!

Year: The current school year is automatically defaulted and is used when extracting records from the transcript file (GRD.450).

Education Level: This field is used when option 'A' or option 'I' is taken to determine which files are used when F4 is pressed on subject area and course identifier code. This field is required. However, for option 'G' and option 'T' educational level is pulled from MSD.330

State District: Enter the five (5) digit District ID in this field.

State School: Enter the five (5) digit State School ID in this field.

Clear the TSDL Collection File?: Entering ‘Y’ in this field will clear the MSD.450 files prior to creating new MSD.450 records. Note that ALL records will be cleared if ‘Y’ is entered, not just the records for the district and school entered. A switch setting is available in ACS.310 to set the default for this field.

Get grades from: Options ‘G’ or ‘T’ will extract course and grade information from either the current grading file in CIMS (pgrd410) or the transcript records (pgrd450). When options ‘A’ or ‘I’ are taken, the program has the capability to create course and grade records in MSD.450 for students that aren’t currently scheduled into courses in SCH.410.

Limit to – Class: If you wish to build the TSDL file by class level, enter each class level here. You must enter a class level in this field when taking either option ‘A’ or option ‘I’. This is the student’s current class level in the Basic Student Information screen.

Page 79: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 75

MSD.620 - Build TSDL Download File (cont’d)

Limit to – Homeroom Teacher: If you wish to build the TSDL file by homeroom teacher, enter the homeroom teacher here. Note! This is only available for option ‘I’. This is based on the homeroom teacher in the Registration screen. When option ‘G’ is taken, to extract course and grade data from the CIMS current grading files, the following prompt screen is displayed. Here, you must select which marking periods you wish to include. You also have the option to limit to student by Tag. Note that you may run the program multiple times for each building. For example, to pull SM2 grades from the CIMS grading file and SM1 grades from the transcript file. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.02

District: ASD School: AJH Class: Year: 11 Educational Level: S (E/S)

Clear the TSDL Collection File? N (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: G

Limit to:

Tag: ___ Include/Exclude: I (I/E)

Get Current Grades From

Marking Period: SM1 SM2

Scheduled Term (1-6): 1 2

Select: Y Y

When option ‘T’ is taken, to extract course and grade data from the CIMS transcript file, the following prompt screen is displayed. You may select only one option at the bottom per ‘run’ of the program. For example, if you wish to pull transcript records for students recently dropped, you would run the program once for ‘Unassigned Only’ and a second time for ‘All’. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.03

District: ASD School: AJH Class: Year: 11

Clear the TSDL Collection File? N (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: T

Get Transcripted Grades For

All? Y

-or-

Unassigned Only? N

-or-

Multiple Students? N

-or-

Tag: ___ Included/Exclude: I (I/E)

-or-

Grade Titles: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

-or-

Transcripted Term: _ _ _ _ _ _

Page 80: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 76

MSD.620 - Build TSDL Download File (cont’d) Be certain to check the ‘Clear the TSDL Collection File’ field before running the program each time, if you will be appending the file. A switch setting is available in ACS.310 to set the default for this field. For those students who have not been ‘formally’ scheduled in CIMS that you still wish to submit through TSDL, it’s possible to run MSD.620 to create course/grade records within the TSDL software. (Note! This will not create course requests in SCH.410.) When option ‘A’ is taken, class level is required. You also have the option to limit to a homeroom teacher. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.01

District: ASD School: AEL Year: 11 Educational Level: S (E/S)

State District: _____ State School: _____ (Used only for Option I)

Clear the TSDL Collection File? Y (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: A

G=Current Grades

T=Transcripted Grades

A=Assign Now

I=Assign Now for SR301IM

Limit to:

Class: 02 (Class Required for Options A & I)

Homeroom Teacher: KOST B (Only for Option A)

Upon pressing <Enter>, additional fields are presented where the course information to be created can be specified. Now, if you select to limit to a homeroom teacher you will need to enter the PIC number for that teacher. However, if you leave homeroom teacher blank, the homeroom teacher will be retrieved from the registration screen, then will get the PIC number from STU.240 – Teachers.

CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.04

District: ASD School: AEL Class: 02 Year: 11

Homeroom Teacher: KOST B

Clear the TSDL Collection File? Y (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: A

Limit to: Tag: ___ Included/Exclude: I (I/E)

Assign the following currently enrolled at the selected dis/sch/cls above:

Subject Area: 73 Course Identifier Code: 32

Local Course ID: 2ND (not verified)

Local Course Title: SECOND GRADE____________

Course Section: _____

Course Type: 01

Academic Year: 2010 2011 (Format: 2009-2010)

Credits Granted: 0.00 (Format: 9.99)

Course Grade: CR

Completion Status: CP

Pic 1: ___________

Virtual Delivery: N Mentor Teacher: N

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET

Course, grade and PIC information will be written to the MSD.450 for each student in the specified school and class level. Course and grade records can also be manually added and maintained in MSD.450.

Page 81: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 77

MSD.620 - Build TSDL Download File (cont’d) When option ‘I’ is taken, it will create records for Non-CIMS students stored in SR.301IM. For this option, State District, State School and Class are required before you can continue. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.01

District: ASD School: AEL Year: 11 Educational Level: E (E/S)

State District: _____ State School: _____ (Used only for Option I)

Clear the TSDL Collection File? Y (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: I

G=Current Grades

T=Transcripted Grades

A=Assign Now

I=Assign Now for SR301IM

Limit to:

Class: 02 (Class Required for Options A & I)

Homeroom Teacher: ______ (Only for Option A)

Upon pressing <Enter>, additional fields are presented where the course information to be created can be specified. You have the option to limit to multiple students. Note! Unlike the other options, you need to enter the PIC numbers. CMTSMS Build TSDL Download File..................CMT Ref: MSD.620P.04

District: ASD School: AEL Class: 02 Year: 11 Educational Level: E (E/S)

State District: 70350 State School: 04622 (Used only for Option I)

Clear the TSDL Collection File? Y (N=will append records/Y=will clear all)

Get grades from: I

Limit to: Multiple Students? N (Y/N))

Assign the following currently enrolled at the selected dis/sch/cls above:

Subject Area: 73 Course Identifier Code: 32

Local Course ID: 2ND (not verified)

Local Course Title: SECOND GRADE____________

Course Section: _____

Course Type: 01

Academic Year: 2010 2011 (Format: 2009-2010)

Credits Granted: 0.00 (Format: 9.99)

Course Grade: CR

Completion Status: CP

Pic 1: ___________ Pic 2: ___________ Pic 3: ___________

Virtual Delivery: N Mentor Teacher: N

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET

Page 82: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 78

MSD.450 – Maintain All TSDL Information

When MSD.620 is run, it will create a maintenance file, MSD.450, where data may be viewed or modified. You may index by student name, even though the file is keyed by the UIC number. Remember, maintenance of data in this file is not recommended, as manually entered data can be overwritten if the MSD.620 is run for the same school and class level. CMTSMS Index of TSDL Student by Name Ref: MSD.450X.02

Position to Last Name: KOLKA____________________ First: _______________

"X" Last Name First Name UIC# Birth Date Sch Lea

_ ALMENAREZ WHODATT 0987654321 1996/11/10 04622 70350

_ ALMIGHTY BRUCE 0000001921 1991/08/14 04622 70350

_ ANTVELINK PINKYWINK 0000001030 1998/09/11 04622 70350

_ ARESOL HAIRSPRAY 1235555555 1984/04/15 04622 70350

_ ARMSTRONGARM BEEGUY 0000001415 1983/02/27 04622 70350

_ BAILEY GEORGE 1234567890 1992/08/01 04622 70350

_ BAKEDBEANS BROWNSUGAR 0000000185 1988/01/25 04622 70350

_ BEARMEISTER FLUFFY 0000001557 1975/05/05 04622 70350

Accessing the first screen of the maintenance file displays basic demographic data. Note the format of the Date of Birth.

CMTSMS Maintain All TSDL Information.............CMT Ref: MSD.450 .11

UIC#: 1122112211

Personal Core

Name (FML): AMY RENAY KOLKA

Name Suffix: ___ Date of Birth: 1992/01/02 Mult Birth Ord: 01

Gender: F

Submitting Entity

Submitting Entity: 70350 Submitting Entity Type: D

Entity Demographics

Operating ISD #: 02 Operating Dist # . : 70350 School/facility: 04622

Student Number: 000003818 Grade Level . : 07

S2E2 Code. . . : 41020

Pressing <Enter> a second time will display all course, grade and PIC information for the terms specified in the MSD.620 prompt. Page down to see additional courses. Note! If you are manually adding a course to this file, you must use the dash (-) on the keyboard, not the dash on the number pad for the Academic Year field. CMTSMS Maintain All TSDL Information.............CMT Ref: MSD.4501.11

UIC#: 1122112211 AMY R. KOLKA

Sbj Local

Area Crs Crs Crs Crs Academic Crdts Cmpt

Code Id Id Local Course Title Sect Typ Year Erned Sts

01 51 COM200 NETWORK ENGINEERING 001 01 2010-2011 .500 CP

Grade: A Virtual? Y Mentor? Y Education Level: S

Pic 1: 32314 Pic 2: ________ 0 Pic 3: 0

01 51 COM200 NETWORK ENGINEERING 001 01 2010-2011 .500 CP

Grade: B Virtual? Y Mentor? N Education Level: S

Pic 1: 32314 Pic 2: 0 Pic 3: 0 +

Page 83: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 79

MSD.540 - Report of Teachers with PIC Running this program will provide a report listing all teachers with (and without) PIC numbers in the STU.240 Teacher file in CIMS. This aids in the correction of data in STU.240 and accuracy in the TSDL Collection. CMTSMS Report of Teachers with PIC Ref: MSD.540P.01

District: ___

Limit to:

School: ___

Teacher: ______

Print teachers with blank or missing pic #s only? N (Y/N)

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

District: Enter the CIMS district code you wish to run the report for. School and/or Teacher: If you wish to run the report and limit it to a particular school or teacher, enter the CIMS school and/or teacher code in these fields. Print teachers with blank or missing pic #s only?: Enter Y/N in this field to determine which teachers will be included in the report.

MSD.550 - Detail/Summary List of Students from TSDL Running this program will provide a report that will list the students in TSDL. CMTSMS Detail/Summary list of Students from TSDL CMT Ref: MSD.550P.01

Limit to:

Oper. Dist: _____

Facility: _____

Grade or Setting: __

Print Options:

Summary: Y (Y/N)

Detail: N (Y/N)

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Oper. District: Enter the State district code you wish to run the report for. Facility: Enter the State school code you wish to run the report for. Grade or Setting: Enter the class level you wish to run the report for. Summary: Enter Y to print all students that are in the TSDL file. The report will list the student’s name, ID, gender, current class, their currently enrolled district and school, and the number of courses they have in the TSDL. Detail: Enter Y to print in detail all of the student’s TSDL courses.

Page 84: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 80

MSD.555 - Detail/Summary List of Teachers from TSDL Running this program will provide a report that will list the teachers in TSDL. CMTSMS Detail/Summary list of Teachers from TSDL CMT Ref: MSD.555P.01

Limit to:

Pic #: _______________

Print Options:

Summary/Detail/Both: S (S/D/B)

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Pic #: Limit the report by the teachers Pic #. Summary: Select S to print all the teachers that are in the TSDL file. The report will list the teacher’s Pic #, name, information on the course they are teaching, and the number of students in their class. Detail: Select D to print in detail all of the teachers in TSDL and detailed information on the students that are in their class. Both: Selecting B will print both the summary and detail reports.

MSD.560 - Teachers Courses Not in the TSDL Collection This program will allow the user to select a district, school or pic # to view the courses that are in their SCH320/SH320TL file but are not in the MSD450 file. CMTSMS Teachers Courses not in the TSDL Collection Ref: MSD.560P.01

District: _____

Limit To:

Facility: _____

Pic #: __________

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

District (Required field!): The district that you wish to run the program for. School: The school that you wish to limit the program to run for. Leave this field blank to view all schools in your selected district. Pic #: The Teacher Pic # that you wish to limit the program to run for. Leave this field blank to view all the pic #s in your selected district.

Page 85: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 81

MSD.570 - Report of Teacher Endorsements This program will allow the user to select a district, school or pic # to view the courses that are in their SCH320/SH320TL file but are not in the MSD450 file. CMTSMS Report Of Teacher Endorsements Ref: MSD.570P.01

District: ___

School: ___

Teacher ID: ______

Only print the teachers/courses N

that do NOT MEET the course

requirements?

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

District: The district that you wish to run the program for. Leave this field blank to view all districts. School: The school that you wish to limit the program to run for. Leave this field blank to view all schools in your selected district. Teacher ID: The ID of the teacher that you wish to limit this report to. Leave this field blank to view all teachers in the district and school you have selected.

MSD.600 - Build MSDS Files for the State Use this program to build all MSDS files needed for State reporting. These files will be in XML format and stored in “/CMT/SRSD/EXPORT” on your Integrated Files System (IFS). Once requests have been entered, F13 must be used to submit these requests to be processed. Note that since each submission can differ, consult the State website/documentation for specific information on which date range should be used for each file submission. Enter the appropriate code for the collection file you wish to build: CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State............CMT Ref: MSD.600P.01

Processing: Y Enter "Y" for MSDS General Collection (CIMS/Non-CIMS)

Enter "Y" for CIMS Students Non-General/Non-TSDL Collections

Enter "N" for Non-CIMS Non-General/Non-TSDL Collections

Enter "T" for Teacher Student Data Link (TSDL) Collections

Page 86: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 82

MSD.600 - Build MSDS Files for the State (cont’d) If you entered ‘Y’ (to build a General Collection or non-TSDL collection file for students enrolled in CIMS), you will be prompted to enter the CIMS District code. After the CIMS District code is entered, the program will reference the SR.200 mapping file to determine the State-assigned District code to be used in the submission file. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.01

Process for:

District: ASD

Note that when ‘N’ is entered in the initial screen, the program will require the State district ID, rather than the CIMS District code. When ‘N’ is used, student data is extracted from SR.301IM rather than CIMS/STU.301. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.02

Process Non-CIMS Students for:

State Operating District: 70350

Select only one option on the next screen by typing ‘Y’ in the appropriate field. Note that for the Fall, Spring and End of Year collections, it is necessary to run the SR.500 and SR.550 (when applicable). Refer to the Appendix section in the back of this manual for more information on each submission. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.03

Process for:

District: ASD

Build File for: (choose one)

Fall Collection? _ (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 first)

Spring Collection? _ (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 first)

EOY Collection? _ (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 First)

Student Record Maintenance? _ (blank=No/Y=Yes/S=End of Summer Snapshot)

Early Childhood? _

Program Collection Dates: 0/00/00 Thru 0/00/00 (Early Childhood only)

Fiscal Entity Type: _ (A/D) (Early Childhood only)

Fiscal Entity Code: _______ (Early Childhood only)

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET F12=PREVIOUS

Page 87: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 83

MSD.600 – General Collections (Fall, Spring, End-of-Year) When any of the general collections are selected, an additional ‘limit to’ screen is presented where you may limit to school or multiple students. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.06

District ASD Spring Collection

State Operating District:

Limited to:

School/Facility:_____

Multiple Students? N

Count Date: 2/09/11

Print Student Listing? N Sort Dist/Alpha? Y

OK TO PROCEED? Y

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET F12=PREVIOUS

Note that SR.240 – Bypass Schools & Classes is checked during the build to see if either the school or class the student is enrolled in is bypassed. If the school and class are found in the SR.240 file, the student will be bypassed and not included in the submission.

Entity Demographics has been retired and replaced with School Demographics, and has had the S2E2 Code added to it. S2E2 Code is the code used when the student is being educated through a Specialized Shared Educational Entity (S2E2). Enrollment is a new element that was originally known as District Enrollment. It will consist of Enrollment Date, Enrollment Type, Exit Status, Exit Date, and Exit Type. They are just moved from other components. Membership is also a new element that will consist of Date of Count, Student Residency, and Ten30Day Rule. They are just moved from other components. Discipline will merge the Discipline Incident and Discipline Consequence elements into one, with the addition of two more fields. Serious Bodily Injury will indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence with injury and the injury inflicted meets the definition of Serious Bodily Injury per the United States Code paragraph (3) of subsection (h) of section 1365 of title 18: “(3) The term “serious bodily injury” means bodily injury which involves:

(A) A substantial risk of death; (B) Extreme physical pain; (C) Protracted and obvious disfigurement; or (D) Protracted loss or impairment of the function of a bodily member, organ, or mental

faculty.”

Page 88: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 84

MSD.600 – General Collections (Fall, Spring, End-of-Year) (cont’d) The second field is Sexual Assault which will indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence, oral, anal, or vaginal penetration forcibly or against the persons will, or where the victim is incapable of giving consent, also includes rape, fondling, indecent liberties, child molestation, and sodomy. You now have the ability to report up to three (3) consequences for an incident per student. Initial Consequence, Initial Days, Initial Start Date, Secondary Consequences, Secondary Days, and Secondary Start Date, Other Consequence, Other Days and Other Start date. SNE (Supplemental Nutrition Eligibility) is once again being reported through the general collection. EC Special Ed Assessment now allows two (2) occurrences.

MSD.600 - Student Record Maintenance (SRM) When the Student Record Maintenance submission is selected, the date selection screen is slightly different than the date selection screen for the General Collections: CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.07

Process for:

District: ASD Student Record Maintenance

Set As of Date to: 102910 Count Date: 102910 Seat Waiver Time Tag: STW

Get Phone Number from Student Phone? N (N-Will use resides with Fmly Phn#)

Update SR301SE/SR301RF/SR301ES from CMT Sp Ed? Prior Count Date

Opt: 8 Dates 093010 - 102910 Enrolled Since: 093010

6=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Enrolled On or Before FROM

Date; Dropped Students not Included. Limit to selections also checked.

7=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Dropped on/betwn Dates.

Limit to selections also checked.

8=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Enrolled On or Before THRU

Date and Dropped on/after FROM Date. Limit to selections also checked.

9=Students based on limit to selections and where they are now.

Include Program Data for: 093010 - 102910

Limit to: Do not use for SR.301IM records

School: ___

Class: __

Student No. __________ or Multiple Students? N (Y/N)

Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ I/O _

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET F12=PREVIOUS

Set As of Date to: Records are recorded at the State according to this date. For dropped students, the program will use a student's exit date. For enrolled students, use a date that is appropriate for the State to recognize that this is when the data changed. Count Date: Enter the date the reporting district completed this submission. CEPI and MDE uses this date to associate a student record to a specific time period. Seat Waiver Time Tag: If you have tagged your students who should be submitted with a Seat Time Waiver, enter that tag in this field.

Page 89: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 85

MSD.600 - Student Record Maintenance (SRM) (cont’d) Get Phone Number from Student Phone?: If set to ‘Y’, the program will attempt to locate a student phone number first. If no number is found in the student phone, the family phone number from the 'Resides With' family will be pulled (if found). Update SR301SE/SR301RF/SR301ES from CMT Sp Ed?: If set to ‘Y’, the program will update the MSDS Special Education data with the data from CMT Special Ed for the Date range that the ‘Include Program Data’ field specifies. Just like when running SR.500, please run SR.290 to remove all records first, because this option will not remove records that are in SR301SE, SR301RF or SR301ES by mistake. Opt: Enter the process you would like the program to use to build the file selected on the previous screen. If a student doesn't have a matching SR.360 record, the student will be bypassed. 6=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Enrolled On or Before FROM Date: Only enrollments are processed, drops aren’t included. Student must have an enrollment date on or before the ‘from’ date, ‘thru’ date is ignored; limit to options checked. 7=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Dropped on/betwn Dates: Only withdrawals are processed, enrollments aren’t included. Student must have a withdrawal date on or between the dates entered in the Dates field. Enrollment/withdrawal codes mapped to '19' or ‘99’ are omitted; limit to options checked. 8=Based on Enrollment History, All Students Enrolled On or Before THRU Date and Dropped on/after FROM Date: Uses specified date range to read through student enrollment history records. Enrollment/withdrawal codes mapped to '19' or ‘99’ are omitted; limit to options checked. 9=Students based on limit to selections and where they are now: This option doesn't use the date fields, only the limit to options. Enrolled or dropped students will be selected based on where their most recent enrollment record determines them to be. If the record is bypassed in SR.240 or mapped to '99'=No show, the student will be omitted. Dates: Use the date range fields (from and thru) to determine enrollment and withdrawal records (and associated student data) that will be included in the submission file. The date fields work in conjunction with the preceding option field. Enrolled Since: The program will pull all records for students with an enrollment date on or after the date entered – works with option 8 only. Include Program Data for: This field is only used for program enrollments that don't have dates. Example 1: Summer migrants will only be included for students with migrant records that fall within the date range entered. Summer migrants are only reported during the End of Summer Student Record Maintenance submission. Example 2: Initial IEP will only be included for students with Parent Permission received dates that fall within the date range entered. Limit to: To further narrow the selection of students for the submission, enter the limitations in these fields. You may limit by school, class, student/multiple students or tags.

Page 90: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 86

MSD.600 - Student Record Maintenance (SRM) (cont’d) Note! Entity Demographics has been retired and replaced with School Demographics, and has had the S2E2 Code added to it. S2E2 Code is the code used for when the student is being educated through a Specialized Shared Educational Entity (S2E2). Enrollment is a new element that was originally known as District Enrollment. It will consist of Enrollment Date, Enrollment Type, Exit Status, Exit Date, and Exit Type. They are just moved from other components. Membership is also a new element that will consist of Date of Count, Student Residency, and Ten30Day Rule. They are just moved from other components. Discipline will merge the Discipline Incident and Discipline Consequence elements into one, with the addition of two more fields. Serious Bodily Injury: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, this field will indicate if the Incident Type involved physical violence with injury and the injury inflicted meets the definition of Serious Bodily Injury per the United States Code paragraph (3) of subsection (h) of section 1365 of title 18: “(3) The term “serious bodily injury” means bodily injury which involves –

(A) A substantial risk of death; (B) Extreme physical pain; (C) Protracted and obvious disfigurement; or (D) Protracted loss or impairment of the function of a bodily member, organ, or mental

faculty.” Sexual Assault: Using the valid values of Y/N or blanks, this field will indicate if the Incident Type involved oral, anal, or vaginal penetration forcibly or against the persons will, or where the victim is incapable of giving consent, also includes rape, fondling, indecent liberties, child molestation, and sodomy. You now have the ability to report up to three (3) consequences for an incident per student. Initial Consequence, Initial Days, Initial Start Date, Secondary Consequences, Secondary Days, and Secondary Start Date, Other Consequence, Other Days and Other Start date. EC Special Ed Assessment now allows two (2) occurrences. Course Section ID allows you to select the code which best represents the length of the instruction section for the course that is reported.

Page 91: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 87

MSD.600 - SRM End-of-Summer Snapshot When the SRM End-of-Summer Snapshot is run in MSD.600, note that only one date option is available. All other field functions are the same as SRM. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.07

Process for:

District: ASD Student Record Maintenance - EOS

Set As of Date to: 083111 Count Date: 083111 Seat Waiver Time Tag: STW

Get Phone Number from Student Phone? N (N-Will use resides with Fmly Phn#)

Opt: 7 Dates 063011 - 083111

7=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Dropped on/betwn Dates

Students selected will be limited to those with drop codes. All codes mapped

to 99=No Show/Never Been Enrolled or 19=Expected to Continue will be OMITTED.

Include Program Data for: 063011 - 083111

Limit to: Do not use for SR.301IM records

School: ___

Class: __

Student No. __________ or Multiple Students? N (Y/N)

Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ I/O _

F3=EXIT F4=Index F5=RESET F12=PREVIOUS

MSD.600 – TSDL Submission When ‘T’ has been entered in the prompt, the following confirmation screen is displayed. Entering ‘Y’ in the OK to Proceed? field will convert all data in the MSD.450 file to the required xml format. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State............CMT Ref: MSD.600P.00

Process TSDL Submission:

All student records in MSD.450 will be included.

Please locate your file in the IFS and submit to the State.

OK TO PROCEED? Y

Page 92: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 88

MSD.600 – Early Childhood Submission Only when building the Early Childhood submission file, it is necessary to complete the fields at the bottom of the screen in the Program Collection Dates area. CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.03

Process for:

District: ASD

Build File for: (choose one)

Fall Collection? (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 first)

Spring Collection? (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 first)

EOY Collection? (pulled from SR.301, must run SR.500 & SR.550 First)

Student Record Maintenance? (blank=No/Y=Yes/S=End of Summer Snapshot)

Early Childhood? X

Program Collection Dates: 111810 Thru 020911 (Early Childhood only)

Fiscal Entity Type: D (A/D) (Early Childhood only)

Fiscal Entity Code: 70350 (Early Childhood only)

After pressing <Enter>, the date selection screen is presented, just as with other submissions. (Be sure to check the CEPI website for each collection to determine the appropriate dates to be used.) CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.04

Process for:

District: ASD Early Childhood ___v

Option: 4 Dates: 111810 - 020911

1=Based on Basic Student Information Current Dis/Sch/Cls

2=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records in the Cur Yr

3=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on a Date

4=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/betwn Dates

5=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/after Date

6=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/before Date

Limit to:

School: ___

Class: __

Student No. __________ or Multiple Students? N (Y/N)

Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ I/O _

1=Based on Basic Student Information Current Dis/Sch/Cls: This option produces a file containing enrolled students based on the current year's Basic Student Information.

2=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records in the Cur Yr: Students must have an enrollment record THIS YEAR in the Enrollment Screen to be downloaded.

3=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on a Date: Students must have an enrollment record for the date entered.

4=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/betwn Dates: Students must have an enrollment record on or between the dates entered.

5=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/after Date: Students must have an enrollment record on or after the date entered.

Page 93: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 89

MSD.600 – Early Childhood Submission (cont’d) 6=Based on Enrollment History, All Student Records on/before Date: Students must have an enrollment record on or before the date entered.

Limit to: To further narrow the selection of students for the submission, enter the limitations in these fields. You may limit by school, class, student/multiple students or tags.

Upon pressing <Enter> again, a confirmation screen is presented indicating the specifications you have previously entered for the submission.

CMTSMS Build MSDS files for the State Ref: MSD.600P.05

District ASD Early Childhood

Dates.... 11/18/10 - 2/09/11

Based on Enrollment History, All Student Enrollments on/between Date

Limited to:

School

Class

Student or multiple students? N

Tag(s) I/O

Clear data from existing file? Y (Y/N)

Submitting Entity: D

Submitting Entity Code: 70350

OK TO PROCEED? Y

Clear Data From Existing File?: Entering 'Y' in this field will clear the selected file for ALL schools within the specified district, NOT just the school entered. Entering 'N' will not clear the selected file, therefore, the selected records will be added to the existing file.

Submitting Entity (Required field!): Enter a valid one (1) character Submitting Entity code to include in the file or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid codes.

When the current selection is completed, leave OK TO PROCEED? = ‘Y’ and press <Enter>. The program will then return you to the first screen and include an F13 - Process option to execute to program.

To review or change the current selection, press F12 to return to the previous screens or type ‘N’ in OK TO PROCEED to return to the first screen to review all current data entered. Changes may be made to selection criteria and processing continued as stated above.

Note! Fiscal Entity Type has been moved to EC Programs.

Page 94: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 90

SR.721 (SR.721N) – Create MSDS UIC or Early Roster File

The SR.721 will extract data from student files stored in CIMS and create either a UIC upload or an Early Roster file in XML format that is written to the IFS of the iSeries. The files created in the IFS are RequestforUIC2011_12_70350.xml or EarlyRoster2011_12_70350.xml.

District: Enter the District ID you would like to create the file for or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid District codes. To include all districts within the MSD.200 file, leave the district blank. If district is left blank, validation of the remaining fields may not be performed correctly.

Submitting Entity: Enter a valid one (1) character Submitting Entity code to include in the file or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid codes.

Submitting Entity Code: Enter the five (5) digit state assigned code to include in the file.

Build Early Roster or UIC: Enter R for Early Roster or U to build the UIC file.

CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

District: ASD ()

Submitting Entity: D ()

Submitting Entity Code: 70350___ ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

Upon pressing <Enter>, additional UIC file parameters will become available: CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

Select:

District: ASD

Submitting Entity: D

Submitting Entity Code: 70350

Only Download students without UIC codes? Y

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Check the Bypass School/Class file (SR.240)? Y (Y/N)

Limit to:

School: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

and/or Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

or Students: __________ __________ __________ _________ ()

__________ __________ __________ _________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

Only Download students without UIC codes?: The default setting for this field is Y and the file will only include those students who do not have a UIC number.

Append Records to the End of the File?: Enter Y in this field if you wish to add records in the current build of the file to the existing records in the file.

Check the Bypass School/Class file (SR.240)?: If this is answered Y, the SR.240 Bypass file is referenced and students who are enrolled in any of the bypassed schools or classes will not be included in the file.

If the Early Roster file is being built rather than the UIC file, two additional screen options are available.

Page 95: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 91

SR.721 (SR.721N) – Create MSDS UIC or Early Roster File (cont’d)

CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

District: ASD ()

Submitting Entity: D ()

Submitting Entity Code: 70350 ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

Download Current Students NOT Reported in: Enter a library and file (and member if applicable) where the previous General Collection (for End-of-Year) is stored on the iSeries. The SR.721 will only include students in the Early Roster file that were not included at the last End of Year submission.

Download Students with an Original Enrollment Date on or after: Only students with an enrollment record in the current school year on or after this date will be included in the Early Roster file.

CMTSMS Create MSDS UIC File Ref: SR.721P.01

Select:

District: ASD

Submitting Entity: D

Submitting Entity Code: 70350

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Check the Bypass School/Class file (SR.240)? Y

Do you want to send the OEAA Component? N (Y/N)

Limit to: Library File Member

Download Current Students NOT Reported in SMSFILES SR301SUB ___________

Download Students with an Original Enrollment Date on or after 07/01/09

School: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

and/or Tag(s): ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

or Students: _________ _________ _________ _________ ()

_________ _________ _________ _________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

The remaining ‘Limit to’ fields allow you to limit the build of the Early Roster file to a school(s), Class(es), Tag(s) or Students. When answering ‘Y’ to the ‘Do you want to send the OEAA Component?’ field, the user will be presented with a screen to enter information regarding the test type, group code, and research codes for each test component the selected students will be taking. Keep in mind that it is best to run the program once for each OEAA component group. For instance, if classes 03 and 06 will both take in part 01 of the science and math tests, then you can run the program once for both of those classes. The next class (or group) you’d just append the additional records to the end of the file. If student promotions have not been run, there is another menu item called SR.721N that can be used to pull the data based on the STU.301- Basic Student Information’s next year district, school, and class fields.

Page 96: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 92

SR.721 (SR.721N) – Create MSDS UIC or Early Roster File (cont’d)

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.11

E N T E R S E L E C T I O N S

For the MSDS OEAA Assessment Component

Valid Test Type Codes: 01 MEAP, 02 MEAP Access, 03 MI Access(FI),

04 MI Access(SI), 05 MI Access(P)

Valid Research Codes: 01-10

Math Science

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Reading Social Studies

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Writing ELA

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL Note! Entity Demographics has been retired and replaced with School Demographics, and has had the S2E2 Code added to it. S2E2 Code is the code used for when the student is being educated through a Specialized Shared Educational Entity (S2E2). Enrollment is a new element that was originally known as District Enrollment. It will consist of Enrollment Date, Enrollment Type, Exit Status, Exit Date, and Exit Type. They are just moved from other components. Membership is also a new element that will consist of Date of Count, Student Residency, and Ten30Day Rule. They are just moved from other components.

SR.741 – Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR.301IM For those clients that maintain student data on a permanent basis, the SR.740 will extract student information from the SR.301IM file and create either a UIC upload or an Early Roster file in XML format that is written to the IFS of the iSeries. The files created in the IFS are RequestforUIC2011_12_70350.xml or EarlyRoster2011_12_70350.xml. If this program is run a number of times (for example, for numerous buildings or students) keep in mind that the previously submitted XML file will be overwritten unless the ‘Append Records to End of File’ option is ‘Y’. Submitting Entity Code: Enter the five (5) digit State assigned code to include in the file. Submitting Entity: Enter a valid one (1) character Submitting Entity code to include in the file or use the F4 feature to select from a list of valid codes. Build Early Roster or UIC: Enter R for Early Roster or U to build the UIC file.

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

Page 97: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 93

SR.741 – Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR.301IM (cont’d) After pressing <Enter>, additional ‘Limit to’ fields are presented. Enter the School(s), Class(es) you wish to include or omit, if any. Only Download students without UIC codes?: The default setting for this field is Y and the file will only include those students who do not have a UIC number. Append Records to the End of the File?: Enter Y in this field if you wish to add records in the current build of the file to the existing records in the file.

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

Select: District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? U (R/U)

Only Download students without UIC codes? Y

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Limit to:

School: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ () Include/Omit? I

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

In the ‘Limit to’ section of the screen, you may enter any schools or class levels to be Included or Omitted from the build of the file. If the Early Roster file is being built rather than the UIC file, two additional screen options are available. CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.01

District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

Download Current Students NOT Reported in: Enter a library and file (and member if applicable) where the previous General Collection (for End-of-Year) is stored on the iSeries. The SR.721 will only include students in the Early Roster file that were not included at the last End of Year submission.

Download Students with an Enrollment Date on or after: Only students with an enrollment record in the current school year on or after this date will be included in the Early Roster file.

Page 98: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 94

SR.741 – Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR.301IM (cont’d)

CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.0

Select: District: 70350 () Submitting Entity: D ()

Build Early Roster or UIC? R (R/U)

Append Records to the End of the File? N (Y/N)

Do you want to send the OEAA Component? N (Y/N)

Limit to: Library File Member

Download Current Students NOT Reported in SMSFILES SR301SUB ____________

Download Students with an Enrollment Date on or after 07/01/09

School: _____ _____ _____ _____ () Include/Omit? I

_____ _____ _____ _____

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

(c) Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL

The remaining ‘Limit to’ fields allow you to limit the build of the Early Roster file to a school(s), Class(es), Tag(s) or Students. CMTSMS Create Non-CIMS UIC/Early Roster - SR301IM Ref: SR.741P.11

E N T E R S E L E C T I O N S

For the MSDS OEAA Assessment Component

Valid Test Type Codes: 01 MEAP, 02 MEAP Access, 03 MI Access(FI),

04 MI Access(SI), 05 MI Access(P)

Valid Research Codes: 01-10

Math Science

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Reading Social Studies

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

Writing ELA

Test Type: __ Test Type: __

Group Code: ____ Group Code: ____

Research Code I : ___ Research Code I : ___

Research Code II: ___ Research Code II: ___

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=CANCEL Notes! Entity Demographics has been retired and replaced with School Demographics, and has had the S2E2 Code added to it. S2E2 Code is the code used for when the student is being educated through a Specialized Shared Educational Entity (S2E2). Enrollment is a new element that was originally known as District Enrollment. It will consist of Enrollment Date, Enrollment Type, Exit Status, Exit Date, and Exit Type.

Page 99: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 95

SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates Note! This program should be set up prior to the beginning of school. The SR.260 program must be set up for each year designating the count dates that are to be used when calculating the ending date for the period being posted. These dates will also default the count dates into SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD. This program is member specific. Enter the command you wish to use along with the SRSD Download Year to be maintained. CMTSMS Maintain SRSD Download Dates..............CMT Ref: SR.260 .11

SRSD Download Year: 11

SRSD Fall Date: 9/29/10

SRSD Spring Date: 2/09/11

SRSD EOY Date: 6/30/11

Last Scheduled Day of School: 6/06/10

Special Ed Child Count Submission Date: 11/17/10

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Enter the count dates for Fall, Spring, EOY and Last Scheduled Day of School into the appropriate fields.

Page 100: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 96

SR.280 – Maintain District Definitions for SRSD This program allows you to designate attributes or tags for a number of State reported fields. You must also specify which submission you are working with F, S or E. This switch works with the SR.430 program to set the Count Date field to calculate the student’s age as of the current count date. If you have not yet set this switch for the current submission, it is possible that all ages being calculated for the Primary Ed Setting field in SR.301SE are producing errors. Setting the switch to a valid code for the first time will resolve this. While you are working on submitting the current count file, you may still allow students to be dropped. The STU.301T – Student Transfer program has been modified to post attendance for all three submission periods (SRF, SRS, SRE) regardless of when the student was dropped. This ensures attendance is posted correctly, even if the student was dropped incorrectly. CMTSMS Maintain District Definitions for SRSD....CMT Ref: SR.280 .11

District: ASD

Multi-racial Attribute Value . . : 07

Hispanic Attribute Value . . : 06

Residency Status Attribute Number: 12

Resident Lea Attribute Number . : 13 Program Eligibility/Participation II

Resident County Attribute Number : 9 Alternative Education Tag . . : AED

Dev/Retention Kindergarten Tag: DVK

Nutrition Elig. Code Attribute # : 08 Out-of-State Tag . . . . . . .: OUT

or Nutrition Elig. Code Tag . . . .: ___ 21st Century Learning Pgm Tag : 21C

International Student Tag . . : INT

Graduation Exit Code Attribute # : 01 10/30 Day Rule Tag . . . . . .: 30D

or Graduation Exit Code Tag . . . .: ___ Section 504 Tag . . . . . . . : 504

Homeless/Unaccomp. Youth Tag : HML

Multi Birth Code Attribute # . . : 14 Personal Curriculum Tag . . . : OPD

or Multi Birth Code Tag . . . . . .: ___ Early/Middle College Tag . . .: COL

S2E2 Tag . . . . . . . . . . .: ST

Use "F", "S", or "E" to designate the current submission: F (Fall/Spring/EOY)

If you use an attribute for Residency Status, Resident LEA, or Nutrition Eligibility Codes you must use programs SR.270, SR.272, and SR.283 respectively, to link the attribute values to the State codes. This information is downloaded from CIMS when you run SR.500.

If student Resident LEA Attribute is blank, SR.500 will pull the current school and district in STU.301 - Basic Student Information and copy into SR.301B and SR.301.

The State codes must be used if you store Graduation Exit Codes in an attribute or a tag. There is not crosswalk program for these. SR.500 pulls the codes directly from the attribute or tag without checking SR.230 – Maintain Links to State Exit Status Codes. A student must be considered a graduate for the Graduation Exit Code to be pulled. A student is considered a graduate if the current class is 12 and the next year is not 12 or blank.

Page 101: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 97

SR.290 – Remove Stu’s From Programs & Remove Data This program was developed for clients who would like to remove SRSD data in the SR.301B and associated program screens, or data from the SR.301IM file. You can limit the program to a district and school or leave them blank for all districts and schools. Select the programs and associated files you would like to remove by placing “Y” in the field next to the program. To remove all records from the Special Ed file (SR.301SE), the Special Ed Referral file (SR.301RF), Early Childhood (SR.301EC), Early On (SR.301EI), LEP (SR.301BI) or Advanced and Accelerated (SR.301GT), simply add 999999 (without slashes) in the date fields associated with that program.

CMTSMS Remove Stu's from programs & remove data..CMT Ref: SR.290 .01

Limit to: District: ASD (leave blank for all)

School: AJH (leave blank for all)

Remove the students from the following programs and associated files:

mmddyy

Title I: N (Y/N) Sp Ed Exits prior to: 999999__

Migrant Education: N (Y/N) Sp Ed Ref Recd prior to: 999999__

Section 504: N (Y/N) Early Chld Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Career and Technical: N (Y/N) Early-On Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Adult Education: N (Y/N) LEP Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Adv/Acc End Dt prior to: 0/00/00

EC SpEd Asmt Exits prior to: 0/00/00

Clear data in the following fields:

At Risk: N (Y/N)

Imported students - (Remove the Selected Records or Data Below- - - - - - - -

IM Migrant Curr: N (Y/N) Exits prior to: 999999_

Sp Ed Exits prior to: 0/00/00 Discp Incd prior to: 0/00/00

Sp Ed Ref prior to: 0/00/00 EC Exits prior to: 0/00/00

LEP Exits prior to: 0/00/00 EC SpEd Asmt Exits prior to: 0/00/00

F1=HELP F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

If you select to remove the entire SR.301IM, leave the district and school blank and enter 999999 in the ‘Exits prior to’ field. This option will clear the all records, regardless of whether or not the students are still active in the district or have exited.

When removing exited students from the SR.301IM file, it is necessary to enter an exit date next to the program the students are enrolled in, along with an exit date.

Page 102: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 98

SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD This program will only need to be run as part of the process to build your MSDS General Collection files for Fall, Spring and End of Year and can be run as many times as needed to create records in SR.301 and update the SR.301B record. It will also perform the SR.560 function of converting the data to a flat text file in SR301MI. CMTSMS Build MSDS General Collection for SR.301..CMT Ref: SR.500 .01

District: ASD Submitting Entity: D Submitting Entity Code: 70350 Limit to:

School: ___ (be sure school is not entered in SR.240)

Exclude Tags: INT ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Report Options:

Report (Fall/Spring/EOY): S (F/S/E)

Clear SR301 File? Y

Calculate Days Beyond Timeline? Y

Get Phone Number from Student Phone? N (N-Will use Resides with Fmly Ph#)

Seat Time Waiver Tag: STW

Count Date: 2/09/11

Previous Fall Count Date: 9/29/10

Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

SRD 0083 VERIFY THE DATES AND SUBMITTING ENTITY INFO THAT HAS BEEN ENTERED

District: Enter the CIMS District ID for which the download file is being created. Submitting Entity: Select the appropriate code. Generally this field will be set to D for District. Submitting Entity Code: Enter the State ID code for your district. School: Enter the CIMS School ID in this field, if running by school. Schools entered in program SR.240 – Maintain Schools to Bypass for Reporting will not be downloaded. Exclude Tags: You may enter up to six (6) tags for students you wish to exclude. Any students assigned these tags will not have new SR.301B or SR.301 files built. Report (Fall/Spring/EOY): Enter the appropriate code for the submission the download is being created for (F=Fall; S=Spring; E=End of Year). All fields will be downloaded for all reporting cycles. Clear SR301 File?: Entering ‘Y’ in this field will clear the SR301 files prior to creating new SR.301 records. Note that ALL records in SR.301 will be cleared if ‘Y’ is entered, not just the records for the district and school entered. A switch setting is available in ACS.310 to set the default for this field. Calculate Days Beyond Timeline?: For districts using CMT’s Special Ed software package, enter ‘Y’ in this field. If you import your Special Ed records from MICIS or another source, enter ‘N’. Get Phone Number From Student Phone?: Either the family or the student phone number can now be included in the general collection files. However, if the phone numbers are unlisted in CIMS, they will not be included.

Page 103: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 99

SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File for SRSD (cont’d) Seat Time Waiver Tag: Enter the tag used to identify those students eligible for a Seat Time Waiver (a student receiving his/her instruction for three (3) or more courses through a virtual program). Count Date: This date is defaulted from SR.260 – Maintain SRSD Download Dates. The date can be changed by typing over the date that is defaulted. Enter the Count Date for the Fall or Spring submission or the last day of school for the End of Year submission. Previous Fall Count Date: The date of the previous FALL submission is automatically displayed according to the date established in SR.260. This is only required when running the report for the Spring submission. Previous Spring Count Date: The date of the previous SPRING submission is automatically displayed according to the date established in SR.260. This is only required when running the report for the EOY submission. Previous EOY Count Date: The last day of school for the previous school year is automatically displayed. This is only required for the report for the Fall submission.

SR.550 - Merge CIMS/Imported Records to Build Download File This program will merge the data from SR.301IM – Maintain Non-CIMS Student Records into the SR.301 file can be run as many times as needed. After this program completes, data may be maintained in the following ways: 1) Use SR.301IM and rerun SR.550 when the data is ready to be merged again. 2) Use SR.301 to maintain all MSDS data. Keep in mind that changes made in SR.301 will not update data in SR.301IM, and data changed using only SR.301 will be replaced if SR.500 is rerun. When run, it removes all of the records from file SR301 for the criteria you have entered and the records are replaced. CMTSMS Merge CIMS/Imprtd Recs to Bld DWN File....CMT Ref: SR.550 .01

Operating LEA: ________

Limit to:

Administrative Unit: ________

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

Operating LEA: Enter the Operating District LEA for which the download file is being created. Administrative Unit: If the download is run for an individual school, enter the State Administrative Unit ID in this field. If you wish to run the download for the entire district, leave this field blank.

Page 104: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 100

SRSD04 – SRSD Data Reports

SR.620 – Print SRSD Summary Report This report provides information very similar to the Official Student Count Report (FF.214E), and can be run by district or individual schools. Note! Because this report extracts data from SR301MI, you must first run SR.560 – Convert SR301 to the State Format SR301MI. Please note that the option to print a signature line has been added. Also note the report can also be run with the option to ‘bold’ the name of any student that is in Alternative Ed or Special Ed. CMTSMS Print SRSD Summary Report.................CMT Ref: SR.620P .01

Operating LEA#: 70350

School Code: 04622

Print Dropped Students: N (Y/N) Bold Name If In

Print Graduates: N (Y/N) Alternative Ed?: N (Y/N)

Print Last Name First: N (Y/N) Bold Name If In

Print Signature Line: Y Special Ed?: N (Y/N)

Print Report Double Spaced: _ (Y/N)

Hold Report?: _ (Y/N)

Report Type: 1

1 = Detail - Alpha by Class

2 = Detail - Alpha by School

3 = Detail - Alpha by District

4 = Detail - Alpha by District/Class

5 = Total Page Only

6 = Class/Gender/Ethnic Summary

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

If the report is run by class, the report will break and print a total in between each class level. If the report is run by student name, a total will print at the bottom of the report. The option to print a total page only will give a total for the Operating LEA and School entered. The Class/Gender/Ethnic Summary is similar to the FF.214E Fourth Friday Report. You now have the option to bold the name of any student that is in Alternative Ed, Special Ed, or both.

Page 105: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 101

SR.659 – Modifications to SRSD Report Writer Items This program is very powerful and should only be used by authorized personnel. This program allows the maintenance of items that can be used in the SRSD Report Writer Formats program – SR.660, and ultimately what will print from the SRSD Report Writer – SR.630. Items that are displayed here represent data within the SR301 file. CMT will add or delete any items from this menu as dictated by State Requirements or those approved by the SRSD Committee. Changes made in this program will directly affect the items displayed in the Report Writer Format options, SR.660. CMTSMS Modifications to SRSD Report Writer Items...CMT Ref: SR.659 .11

Item Cat Description Size Heading Title

1 BAS OPERATING ISD/ESA # 4 1 OPER OPER__

2 ISD# ISD___

Sample Data Line 99

Display priority 001

If needed, this item may be truncated characters.

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 106: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 102

SR.660 – SRSD Report Writer Formats This program is used to maintain report writer formats. Formats are user-defined. (You have the ability to choose what prints on the report and how it will sort.)

The functionality of the SRSD Report Writer is the same as the CIMS General Report Writer. Add/change the format you wish to access and the SR.660.11 screen appears (labels are not available through this program). Because data will be pulled from the SR.301 file, the five (5) digit State District Code is used, rather than the CIMS District Code.

Note! Not all available items are listed below. When the + sign is present, you may page up or page down to display additional items. It is also possible for authorized users to modify the items displayed in this program through SR.659.

CMTSMS SRSD Report Writer Formats................CMT Ref: SR.660 .11

TEST DESC THIS IS A TEST SRSD REPORT FORMAT

ITEMS 6 7 8 167 176 _ _ _ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Id ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

SORT BY 6 ___ ___ ___

Id ___ ___ ___ ___

PAGE BREAK Y N N N WIDTH 132 LPI 6 CPI 10 LENGTH 66 SPACE 1

Item Description Size Item Description Size

1 BASIC-OPERATING ISD/ESA # 7 2 BASIC-COUNTY OF RESIDENCE 3

3 BASIC-OPERATING DISTRICT # 5 4 BASIC-RESIDENT LEA NUMBER 5

5 BASIC-SCHOOL CODE 5 6 BASIC STUDENT LAST NAME 25

7 BASIC-STUDENT FIRST NAME 15 8 BASIC-STUDENT MIDDLE NAME 15

9 BASIC-DATE OF BIRTH 10 10 BASIC-PHONE NUMBER 12

11 BASIC-GENDER CODE 3 12 BASIC-CITY/PLACE OF BIRTH 20

13 BASIC-STREET ADDRESS 20 14 BASIC-CITY OR TOWN 20

15 BASIC-ZIP CODE 10 17 BASIC-STUDENT ID NUMBER 20

18 BASIC-FTE IN GENERAL EDUCA 4 19 BASIC-GRADE/SETTING LEVEL 3

20 BASIC-DATE OF ENROLLMENT 10 21 BASIC-ATTENDANCE 7

22 BASIC-ETHNIC AMER. IND/ALA 1 23 BASIC-ETHNIC-ASIAN AMERICA 1

24 BASIC-ETHNIC-BLACK/AFRICN 1 25 BASIC-ETHNIC-HAWAIIAN/PAC 1

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

After specifying the items to be printed, press <Enter> to display the following.

CMTSMS SRSD Report Writer Formats................CMT Ref: SR.660 .12

THIS IS A TEST SRSD REPORT WRITER

Report width... 132

|... ... 1 ... ... 2 ... ... 3 ... ... 4 ... ... 5 ... ... 6 ... .

OPER CO. OPER RES SCHL LAST FIRST__________

Col 01-66 ISD# RES DIST LEA CODE NAME NAME___________

99 99 99999 99999 99999 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAA

.. 7 ... ... 8 ... ... 9 ... ... 0 ... ... 1 ... ... 2 ... ... 3 |

A A B H H____________________________________________________

Col 67-132 M I A A A W A____________________________________________________

AA A A A A A A A

Count Classes ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Mode: Change F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

This screen displays the items selected to print and the corresponding number of characters each field will use. Users can change the column headings to be printed by typing over the default column headings. If the page size is extended, you may have to answer ‘Y’ to the printer overrides prompt and adjust the paper size accordingly.

Page 107: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 103

SR.630 – Select and Print Your Own SRSD Report This program will print the report selected based on the format defined in SR.660 – SRSD Report Writer Formats. You may choose to restrict the program with several options on the screens below. REMINDER! The report writer can only be used after running SR.500, as SR.630 gathers data from the file SR.301. You may also want to merge your import records from SR.301IM into the SR.301 file as well, prior to running the report. Use SR.550 to merge the records. CMTSMS Select & Print Your Own SRSD Report.......CMT Ref: SR.630P.01

Operating District 70350 Format NO MS DATA Count Only? N

Deliver to.. _________________ FTE Total N

Report Title ____________________________

SCHOOL _____ _ CLASS __ as on Format? _ SEX _

STUDENT RESIDENCY B SUPPLEMENTAL NUTRITION ELIG. _ _ EXIT STATUS __ _

HOMELESS STUDENT _ _ Discipline Data: X (E=EXP, S=SUS, B=Both, X=Either)

ETHNIC CODE Limit Code PROGRAM ELIGIBILITY

American Indian/Alaskan: _ _ Title 1 . . . . : _ Dev./Ret. Kndr: _

Asian American . . . . : _ _ Special Ed . . . : _ Out-of-State : _

Black/African American : _ _ Advanced & Accel : _ 21st Cent. Pgm: _

Hawaiian/Pacific Island: _ _ Lmtd Eng. Prof . : _ International : _

White . . . . . . . . : _ _ Migrant Ed . . . : _ 10/30 Day Rule: _

Hispanic/Latino . . . : _ _ Adult Ed . . . . : _ Immigrant St : _

Limit to Y/N Section 504 . . : _ Persnl Curric : _

Early Childhood Pgm . : _ Alternative Ed . : _ Early/Mid Coll: _

The only required fields are Operating District and the Format to print. The remainder of the screen is for limiting which students will print on the report. The default for field Count Only? is ‘N’, which means you want the system to print only the detail report. Entering ‘Y’ will produce only the statistical count. If 'Y' is entered in field FTE Total, FTEs for general ed and special ed, as well as total FTE for both will print at the bottom of the report. The School, Student Residency, Supplemental Nutrition Elig., Exit Status and Homeless Student fields can be utilized in the following manner:

Enter a code and leave selection field blank: include only records with specified code.

Leave code blank and enter ‘Y’ in selection field: includes all records that have a value in that field (basically the same as the first option, but does not include records with blanks).

Leave code blank and enter ‘B’ in selection field: includes only records with a blank code field.

Enter a code and put ’?’ in selection field: report will exclude all records with specified code.

Leave code blank and enter ‘?’ in selection field: exclude all records with blank code field.

Entering ‘Y’ next to more than one Ethnic Code, will print students with either ethnic code. In the Code column, enter the rank you wish to print for the corresponding ethnic group. For example, if ‘1’ is entered for White and ‘2’ is entered for Hispanic/Latino, only those students who have ranked White as their first ethnic code and Hispanic/Latino as their second will print. Answer ‘Y’ in a specific Program Eligibility to only print those students within that program.

Page 108: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 104

SR.650 – List Dropped Students from Current & Last Yr With this program, enrollment records in the CIMS PATT270 file in the current and prior fiscal year are evaluated against the Drop Date from the prompt screen to see if they belong on the report. Only records less than or equal to the drop date will appear on the report. If a student has dropped and then returned to the district, they will appear on the report. This allows you to check your Withdrawal Codes. 5/20/03 FY 03 COMPUTER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC 11:11:05 QPADEV0027

CMTSMS List Dropped Students from Current & Last Yr Ref: SR.650 .01

Drop Date: 09/28/05

Limit to:

District: ASD

School: AJH

Sort by Drop Date? N

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Drop Date is a mandatory field and is defaulted to the current date but may be changed. District and School are optional fields. The report will display the student name, ID, withdrawal code, comment, withdrawal date, prior year class, prior year school, current class, and current school. Sort by Drop Date?: If ‘N’ is entered in this field, the report sorts by district, current school, withdrawal code, current class, and student number. If ‘Y’ is entered in this field, the report will sort first by date, then alpha by last name.

Page 109: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 105

SR.655 – Print Alpha List of Enrolled Students

Use this program to print an alphabetical listing of students enrolled in the district. The program will look at the original district entry date in the CIMS Basic Student Record screen in STU.301 to determine the entry date. Only those with a date on or after the date specified will be included on the report. CMTSMS Print Alpha List of Enrolled Students.....CMT Ref: SR.655 .01

Report students enrolled on or after: 08/29/05 (mm/dd/yy)

Limit to: District: ___

School: ___

Options: When printing for an entire district, sort by school? N

Sort by enrollment date? N

Exclude classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

Report students enrolled on or after: Specify an entry date you wish to run the report for. Original entry dates falling on or after this date will be included on the report. Limit to - District: Enter the CIMS District you wish to print the report for. Limit to - School: Enter the CIMS School you wish to limit the report to. Sort by school?: If ‘Y’ is entered, the report will sort first by school, then alpha by last name. The default is ‘N’ and will produce a report listing students alpha by last name. Also, if a CIMS School Code is entered, you cannot enter ‘Y’ in the Sort by School field. Sort by enrollment date: If ‘Y’ is entered, the report will sort first by the original date entered and then alpha by last name. The default is ‘N’ and will produce a report listing students alpha by last name. If both sort options are set to ‘N’, the report will sort alpha by student last name. If both sort options are set to ‘Y’, the report will be sorted by school and then alpha by student last name. Exclude classes: You may enter up to 10 class levels to exclude from the report.

Page 110: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 106

SR.670 – SRSD Count Day Attendance Report This program will check the student enrollment status in CIMS on Count Day and only reports those students who were actually enrolled on Count Day AND had at least one (1) day present between the first day of school and Count Day. On the prompt screen, you may leave the School field blank to run for the entire district and the report will be sorted alpha by school. Note that the program automatically defaults to printing the Detail Report only. For A/B schedules, an additional day will print to show the student’s entire schedule. An option is now available to print the signature line on the report, and to tag any students in the report that were absent on the selected count date. CMTSMS SRSD Count Day Attendance Report..........CMT Ref: SR.670P .01

Report for:

District: ASD

School: AJH

Official Count Date: 0/00/00 Actual Count Date: 0/00/00 MM/DD/YY

MM/DD/YY (If cancelled on official count date,

enter first date back in session.)

Single Student ID? _________

-or- Multiple Student Select? N

Options:

Print Absent Students Only? N Tag Students Absent on

Print Present Students Only? N Count Date? Y

Print Detail Report? Y

Print Summary Report? N

Sort by Class? Y

Print Signature Line? N

Print additional day attendance for A/B day schedule? N

(c) Computer Management Technologies Inc.

A switch setting has been added to ACS.350 (and can be turned on and off in ACS.310) that will allow you to print an ‘A’ whenever there is an absence. Setting the switch to ‘N’ will leave the field blank. Note that if a student is not scheduled into a course for any given period of the day, the $$ symbol will print. Ref: SR.670 Detail Report

Date: 9/06/05 COUNT DAY ATTENDANCE Page 1

Time: 16:26:15 Day added for A/B Schedules? N Count Date: 9/28/05

Count Date +10 Day Rule: 10/11/05

Count Date +30 Day Rule: 10/28/05

CIMS District: ASD AMY'S SCHOOL DISTRICT State LEA # : 70350

CIMS School : AJH AMY'S JUNIOR HIGH State School: 04622

$$ = Unscheduled Period

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R R Periods Present out of these

E E Available Periods for this School

Enr A Att T

Name(L,F,M) Cls Student # Date S Date * 01 02 03 04 05 06

KOLKA, AMY R. TS 3818 08/29 A 09/28 A A A A $$ P

A 09/29 A A A P $$ P

A 09/30 A A P P $$ P

A 10/03 A A P P $$ P

A 10/04 A A P P $$ P

A 10/05 A P P P $$ P

A 10/06 A P P P $$ P

10/07 *P P P P $$ P

Page 111: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 107

SR.670 – SRSD Count Day Attendance Report (cont’d)

On the Detail Report, if “Print present only” and “Print absent only” are both set to ‘N’, the program will print both present and absent students for the Count Day entered at the prompt. If the student is present, “P” is printed on the report in the Date column. If the student is absent, the absence date and Daily Absence Reason Code will print. If the student was absent for only part of the day, the period(s) that the student was present for will print. The date that the student has cumulatively attended all periods of the day is indicated with *.

The SRSD Count Day Attendance Report uses the rules published by the State of Michigan’s Pupil Accounting Manual to determine attendance. Therefore, if the reason is defined as unexcused in CIMS, the program will check for the student’s return over the next 10 school days. If the absence reason is defined as excused in CIMS, the program will check for the student’s return over the next 30 calendar days. If there is no absence reason, the program will use the default reason as defined in ATT.101, Attendance Options. In the Summary Report, when running it for students absent on Count Day, the date of the student’s return will print. Ref: SR.670 Summary Report

Date: 9/09/03 COUNT DAY ATTENDANCE Page 1

Time: 11:03:57 Day added for A/B Schedules? N Count Date: 2/12/03

Count Date +10 Day Rule: 2/25/03

Count Date +30 Day Rule: 3/14/03

CIMS District: ASD AMY'S SCHOOL DISTRICT State LEA # : 70350

CIMS School : AJH AMY'S JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL State School: 00242

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

R R Periods Present out of these

E E Available Periods for this School

Enr A Att T

Student Name(L,F,M) Student # Date S Date * HR 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

KOLKA, AMY R. TS 3818 08/29 10/07*P P P P $$ P

KOLKA, FAYE A. 07 10190 08/29 P

KOLKA, JO 07 10171 08/29 P

KOLKA, JOJOBOBBY 07 10172 08/29 P

KOLKA, JOSHUA A. 09 6819 08/29 P

Page 112: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 108

ST.2260 – General Report Writer Formats ST.5530 – Select and Print Your Own Report Reports for student information can be written using the Student General Report Writer. Both the original CIMS version (STU.260 & STU.530) and CMT’s version (ST.2260 & ST.5530) can be used – the functionality is the same. However, features added as a result of SRSD requests will only be added to ST.2260 & ST.5530. Authorized users can change the items displayed within ST.2260 – General Report Writer Formats, using STU.259 - Modifications to General Report Writer Items. STU.259 will alter displayed items for both ST.2260 and for the CIMS program STU.260. SMS Modifications to General Report Writer Items Ref: STU.259 .11

Item Cat Description Size Heading Title

600 SRD TITLE I___________________ __1 1 TITLE I______ TITLEI

2 1 1_____

Sample Data Line A____________

Display priority 600

If needed, this item may be truncated ___ characters.

Please note that while many SRSD items are displayed in both the ST.2260 & STU.260, the SRSD data will only be included in reports printed from the ST.2260 and ST.5530 programs. Items 51 (Tag Data), 53 (Tag Category), 251 (GPA by Grade Title), 252 (Grade by Grade Title) and 253 (Label for Grade by Grade Title) allow you to enter additional information in the ID row, to narrow report specifications. For example, if you wish to print marking period grades for QT1, QT2 and SM1, you would complete the screen as shown below. When printing labels, however, you are limited to only one Grade Title. CMTSMS GENERAL REPORT WRITER FORMATS.............CMT Ref: ST.2260 .11

AMY TEST DESC REPORT WRITER TEST

ITEMS 1 9 252 252 252 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Id ___ ___ QT1 QT2 SM1 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

SORT BY 9 ___ ___ ___ USE ID CODES FOR FAMILY FIELDS:

Id ___ ___ ___ ___ 1 = FAMILY 1, 2 = FAMILY 2,

R = RESIDING FAMILY (DEFAULT)

PAGE BREAK Y N N N WIDTH 132 LPI 6 CPI 10 LENGTH 66 SPACE 1

Item Description Size Item Description Size

187 SECONDARY PHONE 2 PHONE NU 8 188 SECONDARY PHONE 2 EXTENSIO 6

189 SECONDARY STREET ADDRESS 45 190 SECONDARY MAILING ADDRESS 45

191 SECONDARY FAMILY CITY NAME 25 192 SECONDARY FAMILY STATE COD 4

193 SECONDARY FAMILY ZIP CODES 10 194 SEC FAMILY CITY, STATE AND 30

195 S MAILING CITY, STATE AND 30 196 SECONDARY MAILING CITY NAM 25

197 SECONDARY MAILING STATE CO 4 198 SECONDARY MAILING ZIP CODE 10

201 1ST DATE ENROLLED THIS YEA 8 202 LAST DATE ENROLLED 8

203 1ST DATE WITHDRAWN THIS YE 8 204 LAST DATE WITHDRAWN THIS Y 8

205 LAST ENROLLMENT LOAD 4 206 LAST ATTENDANCE REGISTER 4

207 FIRST ENTRY/WITHDRAWAL COD 4 208 LAST ENTRY/WITHDRAWAL CODE 4

209 LAST ENTRY/WITHDRAWAL COMM 16 251 GPA WHERE ID=GRADE ID 7

252 GRADE WHERE ID=GRADE TITLE 3 253 LAB GRADE ID=GRADE TITLE 17 +

Page 113: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 109

ST.2260 – General Report Writer Formats ST.5530 – Select and Print Your Own Report (cont’d)

An additional screen, ST.5530P.03, has been added, which allows the option of limiting the report to more specific student populations. CMTSMS SELECT & PRINT YOUR OWN REPORT............CMT Ref: ST.5530P.03

Student Residency . . . . : 14 Supplemental Nutrition Elig: __

Homeless Student . . . . . : __

Program Eligibility

Title 1 . . . . : N

Special Ed . . . : N

Early On . . . . : N

Ethnic Code Limit Code Career & Tech . : N

American Indian/Alaskan: N _ Advanced & Accel : N

Asian American . . . . : N _ Lmtd Eng. Prof . : N

Black/African American : N _ Migrant Ed . . . : Y

Hawaiian/Pacific Island: N _ Adult Ed . . . . : N

White . . . . . . . . : N _ Section 504 . . : N

Hispanic/Latino . . . : Y 1 Alternative Educ.: N

Dev./Ret. Kinder.: N

Limit to Out-of-State . . : N

At-Risk . . . . . . . : N 21st Cent. Prgm : N

Early Childhood Program: N International Stu: N Immigrant Status : N

Note! Those users who are not given access to SRSD records through STU.006 will not see the above screen when using ST.5530, and will be unable to print reports containing any SRSD data, even if the items are present in the report format.

ST.525 - Print One Per Family Labels by Zip Code Use this program to print one (1) mailing label per family. When a student has multiple siblings, the name of the last sibling to be entered into the system will be the name printed on the labels.

CMTSMS Print One Per Family Labels by Zip Code...CMT Ref: ST.525P.01

District: ___ ()

School: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () Include/Omit? I

___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ () Include/Omit? I

__ __ __ __ __ __

Label First Line: TO THE PARENT OF:

Use Next Year Info Line? N

Print 10, 12, or 15 characters per inch? 10

Limit To - District: Enter the CIMS District you wish to print the labels for. Limit To - School: Enter the CIMS School you wish to include or omit (I/O) in the labels. You may enter up to twelve schools.

Page 114: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 110

ST.525 - Print One Per Family Labels by Zip Code (cont’d) Classes: Enter the CIMS Classes you wish to include or omit (I/O) in the labels. You may enter up to twelve class levels. Label First Line: This text can be modified as you wish (in all capital letters), but will always default back to ‘TO THE PARENT OF:’. Use Next Year Info Line? If you wish to use the student’s next year school and class information, enter ‘Y’ is this field. Otherwise, the labels will be based on the current school and class in the basic student screen. Characters per inch: In order to accommodate lengthy address lines, you may wish to change the characters per inch to 12 or 15 from the default of 10.

SR.625 – Print SRSD FTE/Headcount Table Report Use this program to print a table report that will display FTE totals and headcount totals broken down by school and cross-referenced by class level. The program will extract information from SR301MI, therefore SR.500 and SR.560 must first be ran. Because the report comes from State data, the classes are displayed by the State Class Code. Special Ed and General Ed FTEs will be combined for each student. Note! When looking at this report in your queue, you will be unable to view the numeric values because of ‘overprinting’ lines. To view the numeric values, the report must be printed. CMTSMS Print SRSD FTE/Headcount Table Report.....CMT Ref: SR.625P .01

Report For:

Operating LEA#: 70350

Limit to:

School Code: 4622 _____ _____ _____ _____ Include/Omit I (I/O)

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____

Classes: __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Include/Omit I (I/O)

Include Dropped Students in FTE Totals: N (Y/N)

Operating LEA#: Enter the five (5) digit State-assigned LEA number. Limit to – School Code: Enter the school(s) you wish to include or omit (I/O) in the report. If left blank, all schools will be included. Limit to - Classes: Enter the class(es) you wish to include or omit (I/O) in the report. If left blank, all schools will be included. Include Dropped Students in FTE Totals: The default is ‘N’. Enter ‘Y’ if you want the report to include dropped students.

Page 115: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 111

SR.625 – Print SRSD FTE/Headcount Table Report (cont’d) Ref: SR.625 BARB’S SCHOOL DISTRICT

Date: 09/27/07 FTE/HEADCOUNT TABLE REPORT

Time: 8:55:23 COUNT DATE: 09/26/07 __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

| | Class| Class| Class| Class| Class| Class| Class| Class| Class| TOTAL|

|_______|_____00|_____ 01|______02|_____03|_____04|_____05|_____06|_____07|_____08|_______|

|LIN FTE| 75.00| 65.00| 80.00| 67.00| 92.00| 82.50| 74.00| 76.00| | 611.50|

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

|LIN HC | 75.00| 65.00| 80.00| 68.00| 92.00| 83.00| 74.00| 77.00| | 614.00|

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

| | | | | | | | | | | |

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

|EHS FTE| 87.00| 84.00| 90.75| 91.00| 79.00| 77.00| 68.00| 91.00| | 667.75|

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

|EHS HC | 88.00| 84.00| 91.00| 91.00| 79.00| 77.00| 68.00| 92.00| | 670.00|

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

|TOTAL | 325.00| 298.00| 261.75| 317.00| 342.00| 319.50| 284.00| 336.00| |2483.25|

|_______|________|________|________|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|_______|

SR.635 - Print CIMS FTE and Head Count Table Report This program has the same functionality as SR.625 and will produce a report that is formatted the same as SR.625. The SR.635 however, obtains its data from CIMS, rather than SR301MI. (See the previous page for sample report.) Note! When looking at this report in your queue, you will be unable to view the numeric values because of ‘overprinting’ lines. To view the numeric values, the report must be printed. Enter the district you wish to run the report for and press <Enter>. CMTSMS Print CIMS FTE and Head Count Table Report Ref: SR.635P.01

District: ZPS ()

F4=Index

F3=Exit F12=CANCEL

Page 116: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 112

SR.635 - Print CIMS FTE and Head Count Table Report (cont’d)

The following screen is accessed, where you may specify further information.

CMTSMS Print CIMS FTE and Head Count Table Report Ref: SR.635P.02

Select:___________________________________________________________

District: ZPS Enrolled as of Date: 020905

Classes that will be displayed in table

DK EA EC EP 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 GR __ ()

Limit to:__________________________________________________________Include/Omit

School: TST ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ () I

___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

F4=Index

Enrolled as of Date: This is the date you are running the report for. For example, you may want to run the report for Count Day to verify which students were enrolled as of that date. Classes: Enter the class levels you wish to have displayed in the report. The program will automatically save the class levels entered until the prompt screen is accessed again. Up to 18 class levels may be entered. Limit to - School: Enter up to 20 schools you wish to include or omit (I/O) in the report.

SR.690 - Class Level/Register Mismatch Report The SR.690 will produce a report that simply displays any student whose current class level in the Basic Student Information screen is not the same as the register class level in patt270. Keep in mind that this program does not exclude from the report, those students who have changed class level throughout the year. CMT Class Level/Register Mismatch Report Ref: SR690 .01

District: ASD ()

School(s): AEL () AJH () ASD () AAA () BBB () CCC () 999 ()

___ () ___ () ___ () ___ () ___ () ___ () ___ () ___ ()

This report compares the class level in the student Basic Student

information with the class level in the attendance register of the

enrollment history record. If the class levels do not match, the student

appears on this report.

F4 or Double Mouse Click=Index F12=Cancel

F3=Exit F12=CANCEL

Page 117: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 113

SR.690 - Class Level/Register Mismatch Report (cont’d) The report will first sort alpha by school, and then alpha by student per school. Ref: SR.690 Page 1

Date: 1/25/05 Time: 16:27:00

ATTENDANCE REGISTER/CURRENT CLASS LEVEL MISMATCH REPORT

DISTRICT: ASD

SCHOOL(S): AJH AHS AEL AAA BBB CCC 999

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

|---------- BASIC STUDENT INFORMATION -----------| |- ENROLLMENT HISTORY -|

SCH STUDENT NAME STUDENT ID CLASS SCH ENROLL DATE REGISTER

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

AAA SMITH, ROBERTO 000010212 09 AAA 2004-12-09 C10

AEL BARTHOLOMEW, ARTHUR T. 000002384 02 AEL 2004-08-26 C01

AEL BOWLER, JAMES T. 000002490 05 AEL 2004-08-26 C04

AEL CALLAHAN, ROSETTA B. 000002507 05 AEL 2004-08-26 C04

AHS CALVO, CHANCE A. 000006603 10 AHS 2004-09-09 C08

AHS FRANK, ANNE M. 000002561 11 AHS 2004-11-16 C10

AHS KLODHOPPER, YAKOV 000002632 GR AHS 2004-08-26 C12

AHS KOLKA, JACOB L. 000010188 GR AHS 2005-01-10 C12

AJH ALABASTER, SAMUEL J. 000006878 AJH 2005-01-20 C07

AJH ALBRIGHT, MICKEY R. 000007103 AJH 2004-09-16 C07

AJH ARMSTRONG, INGA M. 000002517 AJH 2005-01-21 C07

AT.530 – Custom Print Attendance Registers The AT.530 report is a custom version of the standard CIMS ATT.530 report, but has been modified to include District totals. In order to print District totals, you must leave the ‘Schools’ fields blank in the prompt screen. Upon pressing <Enter>, you will be presented with five (5) report options. The last one listed will give you district enrollment totals. SAS Custom Print Attendance Registers.........CMT Ref: ATT.530P.02

District: ASD Date: 9/15/10 Thru: 10/15/10

Description Limit to

Schools: AJH

Registers:

Tags Excluded:

Print:

Attendance Registers? Y

School Attendance Summary? Y

Daily Enrollment Statistics? Y F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

Page 118: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 114

AT.530 – Custom Print Attendance Registers (cont’d)

District totals are provided in the AT545DO report: Device or Total Current Opt File Queue User Data Status Pages Page Copies

_ OAT535 PRT01JUNK AT530 RDY 6 1

_ OAT530 PRT01JUNK AT530 RDY 60 1

_ OAT540 PRT01JUNK AT540 RDY 3 1

_ AT545O PRT01JUNK AT545 RDY 18 1

5 AT545DO PRT01JUNK AT545D RDY 3 1

Monday 11 Feb 2008 490.000 .000 490.000 100.00

Tuesday 12 Feb 2008 490.000 .000 490.000 100.00

Wednesday 13 Feb 2008 490.000 .000 490.000 100.00

---------- ---------- ---------- -------

TOTAL 53,304.000 3.571 53,300.429 99.99

SR.658 – Print Students Expected in Submission Reports The SR.658 report will assist in determining if there are students that have not been included in the current submission file that should have been included. Because the program uses the previous submission’s backup file, you must have a backup file in SR301SUB (created by SR.570 – Create Backup of Your Submission). It compares the backup file from the previous submission to the current submission file, SR301MI. For that reason, you must also have run SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File and SR.560 – Convert SR301 to State Format SR301MI, to create the current submission file. CMTSMS Print Students Expected in Submission Reports Ref: SR.658 .01

District: ASD

Current Rpt (Fall/Spring/EOY): S

Match by UIC OR Last Name, First Name, DOB? U (U/N)

Two reports will be produced: SR658A will list those students who had an exit code of ‘19’ (expected to continue) in the prior submission, but are not included in the current submission. Ref: SR.658A YOUR SCHOOL DISTRICT

Date: 2/16/08 STUDENTS EXPECTED IN SUBMISSION

Time: 13:55:30 NOT INCLUDED IN CURRENT

Database Student Operating School

Student ID Name____________________________ UIC_______ District Code__

4002 ALLEN, ALLEN 4567891117 70350 04622

11214 ARENDSEN, KELL LEE 7889112563 70350 04622

8006 ARENDSEN, ROBERT J. 2339966324 70350 04622

1908 ARNOLD, CHERYL 5948612733 70350 04622

1907 ARNOLD, KEITH 1699584111 70350 04622

Page 119: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 115

SR.658 – Print Students Expected in Submission Reports (cont’d)

SR658B will list those students who transferred to a bypassed building since the previous count and/or those students who have both an exit code of ‘19’ (expected to continue) and an exit reason in the current file. Ref: SR.658B AMYS SCHOOL DISTRICT

Date: 2/01/08 STUDENTS EXPECTED IN SUBMISSION

Time: 13:55:30 CURRENTLY IN EXCLUDED SCHOOL

Database Student Operating School

Student ID Name____________________________ UIC#______ District Code__

18561 LOPEZ, GEORGE 5788469223 70350 04622

MSD.510 – CA60 Tracking Audit Report The CA60 Tracking Audit Report may be run to obtain Detailed or Summary CA60 information stored in the SR360WRK files for a specified date range. If the District and School fields are left blank, only information for the current school year will be included on the reports. CMTSMS CA60 Tracking Audit Report..............CMT Ref MSD.510P.01

District: ASD

School: AJH

Date Range: 090108 - 020109

Student: ___________ or Multiple Students: N (Y/N )

Detail/Summary: D (D/S)

F3=Exit F4=Index F12=Cancel

The Detail report will give all enrollment information from the SR360WRK records for the student(s) selected within the date range specified. A sample of the report is shown here. Because of space restraints within this document, all report data is not displayed. Ref: MSD.510 ASD COMPUTER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC

Date: 2/03/09 AJH AMYS JUNIOR HIGH

Time: 11:07:44 CA60 Tracking Audit Report - Detail

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Student Name: AGUILERA, KRISTEENUH L. Student ID: 6356 Operating District: 70350 Resident District: 70350 State Sc

Homeroom Teacher: Entry/Withdrawl Date: 9/05/08 Ent

Alt Ed? N Dev/Ret Kindergarten? N Out of State? N 21st Cen

Nut Elig Code: 3 Homeless Code: 0 Course Enrollments: 000 0

Sign Out Sheet? CA60 Request Date: 0/00/00 CA60 Comment:

CA60 Request By: Address

Shown here is a sample Summary report. Ref: MSD.510 ASD COMPUTER MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES, INC

Date: 2/03/09 AJH AMYS JUNIOR HIGH

Time: 11:15:39

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Student Student Entry/Withdrawal Sign Out CA60 Request

Name ID Class Date Code Sheet Date CA60 Request By

Address

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

AGUILERA, KRISTEENUH L. 6356 08 9/05/08 E 0/00/00

AIMM, AMY A. 18594 07 9/05/08 E 0/00/00

ALBIN, JIMMY JON JON 55556 08 9/08/08 E N 0/00/00

ALICEA, WHOOPDEEDOO 1135 08 9/05/08 E N 0/00/00

ALLEN, KILEY J. 20052 08 9/05/08 NB N 0/00/00

ALOFS, ASHLEY M. 5001 08 9/05/08 E 0/00/00

ALSIP, GARY 99244 07 9/05/08 E 0/00/00

Page 120: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 116

Appendix A – Process for Creating Student Record Maintenance File (End of Summer Snapshot)

1. Make sure all Schools and Classes to Bypass - SR.240 are set up. 2. Be certain the dates have been set up in SR.260 prior to the beginning of school. 3. Verify the settings in SR.280. 4. Be certain you have all exit codes (including the new State exit code of 99) mapped in

SR.230. 5. Run SR.963 to validate any incorrect grade levels that may be in the SR.360 file. 6. MSD.600 – Build CIMS Download Files for MSDS for each file required at this time. 7. Transfer the file(s) via FTP script, mapped Network Drive from IFS, or iSeries Navigator.

How to Enter Summer Graduates or Summer Withdrawals When recording the withdrawal, use the 243rd day of the year. For most years it will be August 31st - in a leap year, August 30th. The registration program will NOT require that this date be entered into the Attendance Calendar. Other dates may be utilized, but the registration screen will require that they be added to the calendar.

Page 121: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 117

Appendix B – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection – Fall File

1. If you did not run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission after you completed your last

submission, we recommend running it before you start a new one.

2. Make sure all Schools and Classes to Bypass - SR.240 are set up.

3. Verify the settings in SR.280. If tags & attributes are used for gathering data, be sure students have been assigned the tag or attribute. Remember to set the flag for the appropriate submission - this assists in calculating the student’s age as of Count Date along with running SR.430.

4. Run SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs & Remove Data (optional), to clear data that will be imported in the next step using SR.510 – Import into CIMS Files (i.e. Special Ed records).

5. SR.510 – Import SRSD Files into CIMS Files (optional). This program allows you to import records from MICIS or STUREC into your CIMS files. Refer to Appendix H for importing MICIS xml files.

6. SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File to ensure all students have a SR.301B and SR.301 record. (Note this program also runs SR.963 – Update SR360WRK Records, SR.964 – Create SR360WRK Records and FIX.SR360.)

7. Run SR.430 to set the Count Date for the SR.301IM files. The Count Date field is verified against the student’s date of birth to properly calculate the age.

8. Run SR.550 – Merge CIMS/Imported Records (optional) to pull all student records in the SR.301IM – Non-CIMS Imported Students file, into SR.301. (You will only need to run this program if you have students in SR.301IM).

9. SR.301 – This file is recreated each time SR.500 is run. Although data can be corrected in this file, it is preferable to make corrections in CIMS and rebuild SR.301 with SR.500 and SR.550. If any changes are made to this file, the changes should also be made in CIMS.

10. Run SR.630 – SRSD Report Writer (optional) or other available reports to verify your data if needed. Please refer to previous pages in this manual for specific report information – some reports will extract data from SR.301, while others will pull data from SR301MI, etc.

11. Run MSD.600 – Build MSDS Files for the State; also runs SR.560 which creates the xml file.

12. Run SR.620 – Print SRSD Summary Report (optional) to verify student count. Note! This report extracts data from SR301MI only, therefore you must first run SR.500 and MSD.600.

13. Transfer the file(s) to your PC via FTP script, mapped Network Drive from IFS, or iSeries Navigator.

14. Once the file is on your PC, error-check it through an xml editor. Make data corrections in CIMS and rebuild the file by running SR.500, SR.550 (if necessary) and MSD.600. Repeat steps 13 & 14 until the file is error-free, then upload to the State.

15. Run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission when finished with your Fall submission.

16. After a back up copy of your submission has been made, be sure to go back into SR.280 and set the flag to the next submission! This will ensure the student’s age is accurately calculated against the next submission date.

Page 122: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 118

Appendix C – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection – Spring File

1. If you did not run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission after you completed your last

submission, we recommend running it before you start a new one.

2. Make sure all Schools and Classes to Bypass - SR.240 are set up.

3. Verify settings in SR.280. If tags & attributes are used for gathering data, be sure students have been assigned the tag or attribute. Remember to set the flag for the appropriate submission. This assists in calculating the student’s age as of Count Date along with running SR.430.

4. Run SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs & Remove Data (optional), to clear data that will be imported in the next step using SR.510 – Import into CIMS Files (i.e. Special Ed records).

5. SR.510 – Import SRSD Files into CIMS Files (optional). This program allows you to import records from MICIS or STUREC into your CIMS files. Refer to Appendix H for importing MICIS.

6. SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File to ensure all students have a SR.301B and SR.301 record. (Note this program also runs SR.963 – Update SR360WRK Records, SR.964 – Create SR360WRK Records and FIX.SR360.)

7. Run SR.430 to set the Count Date for the SR.301IM files. The Count Date field is verified against the student’s date of birth to properly calculate the age.

8. Run SR.550 – Merge CIMS/Imported Records (optional) to pull all student records in the SR.301IM – Non-CIMS Imported Students file, into SR.301. Note! You will only need to run this program if you have students in SR.301IM.

9. SR.301 – This file is recreated each time SR.500 is run. Although data can be corrected in this file, it is preferable to make corrections in CIMS and rebuild SR.301 with SR.500 and SR.550. If any changes are made to this file, the changes should also be made in CIMS.

10. Run SR.630 – SRSD Report Writer (optional) or other available reports to verify your data if needed. Please refer to previous pages in this manual for specific report information. Some reports will extract data from SR.301, while others will pull data from SR301MI, etc.

11. Run MSD.600 – Build MSDS Files for the State, also runs SR.560 which creates the xml file.

12. Run SR.620 – Print SRSD Summary Report (optional) to verify student count. Note! This report

extracts data from the SR301MI only, therefore you must run SR.500 and MSD.600 first.

13. Transfer the file(s) to your PC via FTP script, mapped Network Drive from IFS, or iSeries Navigator.

14. Once the file is on your PC, error-check it through an xml editor. Make data corrections in CIMS and rebuild the file by running SR.500, SR.550 (if necessary) and MSD.600. Repeat steps 13 & 14 until the file is error-free, then upload to the State.

15. Run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission when you are finished with your Spring submission.

16. After a back up copy of your submission has been made, be sure to go back into SR.280 and set the flag to the next submission! This will ensure the student’s age is accurately calculated against the next submission date.

Page 123: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 119

Appendix D – Process for Creating MSDS General Collection – End-of-Year File

1. If you did not run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission after you completed your last

submission, we recommend running it before you start a new one.

2. Make sure all Schools and Classes to Bypass - SR.240 are set up.

3. For the End of Year submission, you will need to run SCH.608 Set Next Year Information and GRD.601 Set Graduation Date.

4. Verify settings in SR.280. If tags & attributes are used for gathering data, be sure students have been assigned the tag or attribute. Remember to set the flag for the appropriate submission. This assists in calculating the student’s age as of Count Date along with running SR.430.

5. Run ATT.650 – Post Summarized Absence History for SRE Grade Title, from the first day to the last day of the school year.

6. Run SR.290 – Remove Students from Programs & Remove Data (optional), to clear data that will be imported in the next step using SR.510 – Import into CIMS Files (i.e. Special Ed records).

7. SR.510 – Import SRSD Files into CIMS Files (optional). This program allows you to import records from MICIS or STUREC into your CIMS files. Refer to Appendix H for importing MICIS.

8. SR.500 – Build CIMS Download File to ensure all students have a SR.301B and SR.301 record. (Note this program also runs SR.963 – Update SR360WRK Records, SR.964 – Create SR360WRK Records and FIX.SR360.)

9. Run SR.430 to set the Count Date for the SR.301IM files. The Count Date field is verified against the student’s date of birth to properly calculate the age.

10. Run SR.550 – Merge CIMS/Imported Records (optional) to pull all student records in the SR.301IM – Non-CIMS Imported Students file, into SR.301. Note! You will only need to run this program if you have students in SR.301IM.

11. SR.301 – This file is recreated each time SR.500 is run. Although data can be corrected in this file, it is preferable to make corrections in CIMS and rebuild SR.301 with SR.500 and SR.550. If any changes are made to this file, the changes should also be made in CIMS.

12. Run SR.630 – SRSD Report Writer (optional) or other available reports to verify your data if needed. Please refer to previous pages in this manual for specific report information. Some reports will extract data from SR.301, while others will pull data from SR301MI, etc.

13. Run MSD.600 – Build MSDS Files for the State; also runs SR.560 which creates the xml file.

17. Run SR.620 – Print SRSD Summary Report (optional) to verify student count. Note! This report extracts data from the SR301MI only, therefore you must first run SR.500 and MSD.600.

18. Transfer the file(s) to your PC via FTP script, mapped Network Drive from IFS, or iSeries Navigator.

19. Once the file is on your PC, error-check it through an xml editor. Make data corrections in CIMS and rebuild the file by running SR.500, SR.550 (if necessary) and MSD.600. Repeat steps 13 & 14 until the file is error-free, then upload to the State.

14. Run SR.570 – Create a Backup of Your Submission when you are finished with your End-of-Year submission.

15. After your submission is complete, you can now run STU.801 – Year-End Procedure to Promote Students. Please be sure that all buildings within the district are ready for student promotions to occur.

16. After a back up copy of your submission has been made, be sure to go back into SR.280 and set the flag to the next submission! This will ensure the student’s age is accurately calculated against the next submission date.

Page 124: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 120

Appendix E – Process for Creating TSDL Collection File (work in progress)

The Teacher Student Data Link Collection (TSDL) in the Michigan Student Data System will report links between students and the teacher(s) who provide instruction to them. This is a full-year collection. Reported data reflect the student’s performance in classes taken throughout the current academic year and the status of their academic report at the end of the school year. (CEPI anticipates opening this collection in early May 2011.)

1. PIC numbers for teachers will need to be updated or added in the STU.240 – Teacher Maintenance file in the ‘Teacher of Record’ field. If the social security number is present in the MR.319 file (used for REP), it will be cross-referenced into the STU.240 file when the MSD.940 program is run, to pull the PIC number into STU.240. MSD.940 can be limited by teacher or by school.

2. You may wish to run the MSD.540 report to get a listing of teachers in STU.240 with or without PIC numbers.

3. Final Grade Titles must be indicated in GRD.201 for ALL building levels – even at elementary

level. The purpose of this is so that when a student drops, their grades will be written out to the transcript file (GRD.450), just as they are for high school students. This will be the ONLY way to retrieve grades for drops at the elementary level, as well as middle schools, if you’re currently not transcribing grades there.

4. When more than one teacher is instructing a single course section, you must now add these

teachers to the course through the F6 feature in the SCH.320.11 screen. Additional teachers may also be added through SH.320T as well. Note that these additional teachers are for State Reporting purposes only – data does not ‘cross over’ into the CIMS scheduling module or related reports.

5. All courses that will be included in the TSDL collection will need to be linked to the State codes in the MSD.330 program.

6. Maintenance files SR.177, SR.178, SR.179 and SR.189 house the codes necessary for TSDL course linkage. These will be maintained by CMT, except in the event of a last minute change by the state, which would require you to manually maintain it.

7. MSD.250 houses the Completion Status codes that will be submitted with each course. District or School personnel are responsible for linking the school grade symbols to a completion status in this file.

8. Run the MSD.620 program to create a maintenance file (intermediate, like SR.301) for the TSDL submission.

9. The maintenance file for the TSDL submission is MSD.450. Data can be viewed and changed here, but keep in mind this file will be overwritten when the MSD.620 program is run again.

10. Run the MSD.600 program to convert the data in MSD.450 to xml format.

Page 125: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 121

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files

I. Use FTP script available from CMT for your desktop. A generic FTP script has been set up on the PC of authorized personnel to use to download the MSDS XML files from the IFS to their desktop. This script may be copied and modified for each file transfer to be performed. Modify the script by following these steps: 1. Locate the FTP script on your PC. 2. Right click on the file and select ‘Edit’ then Run. This will open the script in Notepad. 3. Make the changes listed in the box to the right. 4. Save changes and close.

@echo off

set script=c:\ftpscript.txt

cls

echo open 99.99.99.99 > %script%

set /p username=Enter Username:

echo %username%>> %script%

set /p password=Enter Password:

echo %password%>> %script%

echo lcd c:\>> %script%

echo cd />> %script%

echo cd /cmt/srsd/export/99999>> %script%

echo get RequestforFile2008_09XXXXX.xml D8899999UserfileName.xml>> %script%

echo bye>>%script%

ftp -s:c:\ftpscript.txt

del c:\ftpscript.txt

pause

Run the modified script:

1. Double click on the script file. A standard Windows sign-on screen will be displayed. 2. Sign on using your iSeries user ID and password. The script will then process the

transfer. When the process is complete, exit by typing quit.

The MSDS files selected will now be located in the root directory of your PC. You may then proceed with the submission of the file(s) to the State site. Note! Your password will be displayed on the screen so you will want to use discretion when running the FTP script.

a. 99.99.99.99 = Your iSeries IP address

b. 99999 = State District # (directory name on IFS)

c. File2008_09XXXXX = Name of file being downloaded from IFS

d. D is Required 88 = Operating ISD 99999 = State District # UserFileName = File name on PC after transfer (User defined) Entire name must be no more than 20 characters ** Note: both files must have file qualifier of .xml.

Page 126: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 122

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) II. Use iSeries Navigator to Transfer Files.

You may also choose to access the MSDS files through iSeries Navigator. To do this, open the iSeries Navigator through Windows Explorer. Select your iSeries and sign on using your iSeries user ID and password. Select: File Systems > Integrated File System > Root > CMT > SRSD > Export. Select the file(s) to transfer. Drag and drop the selected file(s) to your PC. Proceed with the submission of the file(s) to the State site.

If you cannot find the iSeries Navigator or File Systems>Intergraded File System, please contact your IT department.

III. Map Your Network Drive to the IBM iSeries IFS.

Note! The following was written by Thomas Snyder (with added notes from CMT in our file structure) and extracted from: www.mcpressonline.com/ www.mcpressonline.com/october-31-2008-vol-5-issue-43/tips-techniques/networking/techtip-map-your-network-drives-to-the-ibm-i.html

Use the IFS and NetServer to safely and securely provide file access to users. The IBM i is an extremely reliable system that is an excellent resource for your company's most crucial information. Many PC-centric applications use critical files that may be stored locally on the client's hard drive. When proper backups are neglected and the hard drive fails, you may be left with disastrous results. What better way to provide the most reliable support, backup and accessibility than to store files on and access files from the IBM i? IBM supports this capability with the IFS in collaboration with NetServer. The IFS is the IBM i's directory structure. NetServer provides access to the IFS from a PC or a Mac without the need for additional software to be installed on the client PC. If the client is going to perform administration on shares, the System i Navigator must be installed. Starting with V5R2, NetServer has integrated support for the Samba client on Linux. There are also PTFs available for V5R1. Configuring NetServer A prerequisite to starting NetServer is to have the QSERVER subsystem started and to have the TCP/IP server running. Once you have ensured that these two serves are running, you can start NetServer by going into My Connections. Select the iSeries that you wish to start NetServer on and then select Network > Servers > TCP/IP and you will see iSeries NetServer listed as one of the servers. You can set the server name and domain by right-clicking on iSeries NetServer and selecting Properties.

Page 127: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 123

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Figure 1: Start NetServer by going into My Connections.

You will then see the Properties window for NetServer. It is recommended the server name be set to the system name and that you use the domain name that your Windows user belongs to. To change the NetServer properties, click on the Next Start button (see Figure 2). Figure 2: Set the properties.

After you have changed the settings, you need to restart the NetServer by right-clicking on the iSeries NetServer and selecting Stop. When the NetServer is completely stopped, select Start to apply the new settings. During the backups, you may want to restart NetServer to ensure that there are no file locks. The restart will also disconnect any bad connections. End NetServer with the ENDTCPSVR *NETSVR command prior to the backup commands and then start NetServer back up with the STRTCPSVR *NETSVR command after everything is saved. You may also want to modify your startup procedure after an IPL to automatically start the NetServer.

Page 128: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 124

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Exploring and Creating Directories on the IFS To explore the IFS directories, you can use the WRKLNK command, which lists all of the existing directories on the IFS. To create a directory on the IFS, you can use the MKDIR command on the command line. Securing the Directory on the IFS on the User Level When the directory is initially created, it will assume the authorization of its parent directory. If you create the directory tree structure from scratch from the root, it will give full read and write authority to Public users and the owner of the directory. This is the behavior if you execute the MKDIR command specifying only the new link and leaving the rest of the parameters at the default values. You can change the authorities set on the directory by using option 9 while viewing the directory/file using the WRKLNK command. If you want to allow anyone to have access to the contents of the directory, you do not have to change anything. If you want to secure the folder, you must change the *PUBLIC user data authority to *EXCLUDE. To allow the specified user to access the folder, add the user profile to the list with *RWX data authority (Figure 3). Figure 3: Manage user authorities.

CMT Note! The path name will be /CMT/MSDS/EXPORT/99999 where 99999 = State District # for which directory is to be created. The CMT/MSDS/EXPORT/ directories should already exist on your system. The directories you will need to create will be the directories named for your specific State District #s.

Page 129: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 125

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Securing the Directory on the IFS Using an Authorization List Securing the directory on the user level is good if you plan to have only one user accessing the folder. But if you plan to have a group of users accessing the folder, I recommend using an authorization list. The reason is that when you create objects in a directory, each object is created with a specific list of users who have access to it. Then, if you add another user after some objects have already been created, the new user will not have access to the previously existing items and will have access only to newly created objects. But, if you use an authorization list, the authorization reference will remain the same and users can be added and deleted; the authorization of all of the objects in the directory will be changed. Providing Shares to Allow Network Drives to Be Mapped to the IFS Now that you have the directory created and secured, you need to make it visible to the network by creating a share. You do this in the iSeries Navigator File Systems option, where you can open the iSeries NetServer. In iSeries Navigator, open My Connections, select File Systems, right-click on File Shares, and select Open iSeries NetServer. Figure 4: Open iSeries NetServer.

Page 130: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 126

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Figure 5: Create a share. To create a new share in the iSeries NetServer, click on File > New > File.

Specify the attributes of the share:

Share name is what you will see on the network.

Description is also seen on the network but is not used for mapping.

Access defaults to Read Only. You can change it to Read/Write to allow file modifications.

Maximum number of users specifies the number of users allowed to access the share concurrently.

Path name will match the directory name created with the MKDIR command.

Page 131: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 127

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Figure 6: Specify the share's attributes.

The dollar sign ($) in the share name has a special purpose. If you put a $ at the end of the share name, the file will not be visible when someone is browsing the network. There may be times that you will want it to be visible, such as a shared folder where people can access instructional documentation. In this case, you would probably want to make the access read-only and not use the $ sign. But, in this example, where we are setting up a secure directory for a specific user to store sensitive documents that are business-critical, you would want to use the $ at the end of the share name to secure the folder and hide it from people browsing the network. CMT Note! Do not use the dollar sign ($) in the share name. Allow Read/Write. The path name will be /CMT/MSDS/EXPORT/99999 where 99999 = State District # of Directory to map the drive to.

Page 132: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 128

Appendix F - Methods to Download Your MSDS Files (cont’d) Mapping the Network Drive from the Client to the Server Your network drive is now accessible! On your Windows Client, you will map a network drive to the iSeries server with the new share name that you created. The server name is specified to be either the DNS name that is provided for your iSeries or the IP address of the iSeries. So, to map a drive to the SnyderTom$ share on toms.mcpressonline.com, you will format the name as \\toms.mcpressonline.com\SnyderTom$. Figure 7: Map a drive to the share.

Congratulations! You now have a secure and reliable place to store your crucial documents. CMT Note! The Folder to which to map your drive is: CMT/MSDS/EXPORT/99999 where 99999 = specific District directory to access.

Page 133: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 129

Appendix G – Importing MICIS File as .xml Save the file on your PC, not in the IFS. After it is saved on your PC, open Windows Explorer and navigate to the file. Right click and select open with Wordpad. Once it’s opened in Wordpad, change the “utf-16” to “utf-8”.

Make note of the collection. You’ll need it when running SR.510. Do a File > Save As. In the Save As pop-up box, change the type: FROM: Unicode Text Document

TO: Text Document

But, be certain to change the extension on the File name from .txt to .xml before clicking Save:

When prompted that the ‘File already exists - do you want to replace?’ answer YES. You can now save the file to the IFS and import into CIMS or SR.301IM using SR.510.

Page 134: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 130

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday)

The FFRPT menu contains programs designed to assist in maintaining FTE data. This is the same as the FF.214E, but will look at the students’ current class in STU.301 – Basic Student Information, rather than the register class in the enrollment record.

MENU FFRPT : STUDENT COUNT REPORTING (AKA FOURTH FRIDAY)

1. Fill Student Count Attributes 12,13,14,15...CMT FF.214F

2. Plug FTE's in to files......................CMT FF.214PL

3. Print FTE's Over and Under 1.00.............CMT FF.214PLR

4. Official Student Count by Register Class....CMT FF.214E

5. Official Student Count List By Current Cls..CMT FF.314E

6. Print CIMS FTE & Headcount Table Report ....CMT SR.635

7. Class/Register Mismatch Report..............CMT SR.690

Users can maintain FTEs for General Ed, Special Ed, Vocational Ed and Adult Ed on the Registration and Enrollment Information screen (reference STU.360 .11). However, this will not update the FTE information in CMT’s Special Education program. For now, these must be maintained separately. SAS Registration and Enrollment Information Ref: STU.360 .11

Student No.: 1777 BARBARA A. KOSTICK FEMALE Age: 15

BARB'S TEST Class: 09 Year: 01 Phone: 753-8334

Locker: _______ Counselor: KOST R

Homeroom: 555 Homeroom Teacher: KOST R

Morning Bus: ___ Afternoon Bus: ____

FTE = General Ed: .40 + Adult Ed: .00 + Voc Ed: .00 + Special Ed: .60

Date Code Register Comment Load School District

08/29/05 E C09 Enrolled 1 TST ZPS

________ _ ___ ________ _ ___ ___

________ _ ___ ________ _ ___ ___

________ _ ___ ________ _ ___ ___

________ _ ___ ________ _ ___ ___

Cancel? N

Page 135: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 131

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

FF.214F – Fill Attributes 12, 13, 14 and 15 Use this program to fill or to clear attributes 12, 13, 14 and 15 in STU.301 – Basic Student Information. CMT 4TH FRIDAY REPORTING OPTIONS REF: FF.214FP 01

District: ASD School: AJH (blank for all districts and schools)

Index: _ 1 = Schools

Limit to: 2 = Districts

Class: 08 3 = Classes

Tag: ___ 4 = Tags

5 = Attributes

Attributes to default: (To delete, put ** in the attribute field.

Residency Status 12 ___ If you do not want the attributes already

District Residence ___ assigned changed, leave the attribute

Educating District ___ field blank. This should only be used

Nonconventional Cat ___ with the replace feature.)

Do you want to replace the attributes already entered? N (Y/N)

District: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS District Code you wish to run the program for. This field should be left blank if running for all districts. School: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS School Code, if the program will be run for only a particular school. Limit to - Class: Enter the CIMS Class Code if you wish to restrict the program to a class. Limit to - Tag: Enter the tag you want to restrict the program to. Replace attributes already entered?: The default entry is ‘N’. This will allow the program to assign attribute entries for only those students who do not already have an attribute assigned.

Page 136: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 132

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

Setup Required

Because the State requires the submittal of codes (i.e. Resident District and Educating District) on the Official Count List, there are a few setup steps that must be performed. To make all systems consistent in accessing this information, the following change must be made to the General Student Attributes - STU.107. Add the attributes that are listed in #12 - #15. The attributes must be entered into the same fields as seen below. The attributes established in program STU.107 - General Student Attributes, require table values to be set up as well. SMS General Student Attributes Ref: STU.107 .11

Description Required? Table Low High

1. Year of Graduation Y N __ __

2. Native Language Y Y __ __

3. Ethnic Group Y Y __ __

4. ___________________ _ _ __ __

5. ___________________ _ _ __ __

6. ___________________ _ _ __ __

7. ___________________ _ _ __ __

8. ___________________ _ _ __ __

9. ___________________ _ _ __ __

10. ___________________ _ _ __ __

11. ___________________ _ _ __ __

12. Residency Status___ N Y __ __

13. Resident District__ N Y __ __

14. Educating District_ N Y __ __

15. Nonconventional Cate N Y __ __

Graduation Requirement Plan Attribute Location: 1

These are the attribute values that must be entered into program STU.108 - Table Values for Student Attributes: Attribute Value Description 12 NR NONRESIDENT 12 R RESIDENT 12 DR DUAL RESIDENCY 15 CE COOPERATIVE ED 15 DE DUAL ENROLLMENT 15 HH HOMEBOUND HOSP 15 NP NONPUBLIC 15 NR NON-RESIDENT 15 PT PART-TIME 15 RS REDUCED SCHEDULE 15 SP SP ED PRESCHOOL 15 SS SPLIT SCHEDULE 15 ST SP ED TRANSITION 15 WS WORKSITE BASED

For attributes 13 and 14, enter values that will be used in the district. When FF.214E - Official Student Count List is run, the program also prints a legend of the values entered for attributes 13 and 14. This legend should be sent to the State with the Official Student Count List.

Page 137: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 133

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

FF.214PL – Plug FTE’s in to Files Use this program to automatically insert a General Ed FTE of 1.00 or plug the available previous year FTEs in every student's record by running program FF.214PL - Plug FTE's in to files. Changes can then be made manually to those FTE records that should not equal 1.00. If using CMT's custom Special Ed package, the FF.214PL program will automatically pull the FTEs established in the student's Special Ed record and insert them into the Registration and Enrollment Information. This program has the option to run by district and school, or leave them blank to run for the entire Client. After running the FF.214PL - Plug FTE's in to Files, a report will automatically print listing all the students whose FTE is not equal to one. This program has been modified to look at the switch settings in STU.360, to determine which FTE’s to fill. Prompt Screen FF.214PL CMTSMS Plug FTE's in to files....................CMT Ref: FF.214PL.01

Limit to:

District: ASD (blank for all districts)

School: AJH ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Include/Omit I

Classes: 07 __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ Include/Omit I

Tags: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ Include/Omit I

Use FTE s from previous year if available? N (Y/N)

District: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS District Code you wish to run the program for. This field should be left blank if running for all districts. School: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS School Code, if the program will be run for only a particular school. Up to eight (8) schools may be entered. Limit to - Classes: Enter the CIMS Class Code if you wish to restrict the program to a class. Up to eight classes may be entered. Limit to – Tags: Enter the tag you want to restrict the program to. Up to eight (8) tags may be specified. Use FTEs from previous year?: The default entry for this field is ‘N’. If ‘Y’ is entered, the program will fill the FTE from the previous year’s record. If an FTE cannot be found in the previous year, the program will plug a 1.00.

Page 138: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 134

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

FF.214PLR – Print FTE’s Over and Under 1.00

Program FF.214PLR - Print FTE's Over and Under 1.00, will allow users to print a report at any given time listing the students with an FTE not equal to one. CMT 4TH FRIDAY REPORTING OPTIONS REF: FF.214P 01

District: (blank for all districts)

School: (blank for all schools)

Index: 1

1 = Schools

2 = Districts

Computer Management Technologies, Inc. CANCEL? N

District: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS District Code you wish to run the program for. This field should be left blank if running for all districts. School: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS School Code if the program will be run for only a particular school. This field should be left blank if running for all schools. Index: Enter the appropriate value for the index you wish to access and press the F4 key to view.

FF.214E – Official Student Count by Register Class A student must have an enrollment record to be included on this report. Students that have transferred to another school within the district must have a withdrawal record from the school they have left and a matching enrollment record at the school transferred into, to be included on this report. Students that have transferred out of the district and are not to be included on this report must have a withdrawal record in their enrollment record.

Page 139: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 135

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

FF.214E – Official Student Count by Register Class (cont’d) The final page of this report prints a legend of the values entered for attributes 13 and 14. CMTSMS Official Student Count by Register Class..CMT Ref: FF.214E .01

Report for:

District: ASD

School: AJH

Run Date: 91504 (MMDDYY)

Exclude Tags:

Report Type: 1

1 = By Class

2 = By Homeroom

3 = By School/Student name

4 = By District/School/Student Name

5 = By District/Class/Student Name

6 = Total Page Only

Print Signature Lines after each report type or only on the bottom? B (R/B)

Single, Double, or Triple Space the detail lines on the report? 1

Hold Report? Y (1/2/3)

Computer Management Technologies, Inc.

F3=Exit F4=Index F5=Reset F12=Cancel

District: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS District Code you wish to run the program for. School: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS School Code if the program will be run for only a particular school. Run Date: The current date is the default, but may be changed to any date. Exclude Tags: Enter up to six (6) tags for those students you wish to exclude from this report. Report Type: Select the sorting format for the report. Report type six (6) will exclude all basic student information and provide totals only. Print Signature Lines: Enter ‘R’ to print signature lines after each report break. Enter ‘B’ to have the signature lines print at the bottom of the report. Single, Double, or Triple Space: Enter 1, 2 or 3 to specify the report spacing.

Page 140: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 136

Appendix H - Student Count Reporting – FFRPT (Fourth Friday) (cont’d)

FF.314E – Official Student Count List by Current Class

This is the same report that FF.214E provides, but the program will look at the Current Class in STU.301, rather than the Register Class in the enrollment record. (Note that when FF.314E is accessed, the screen reference is the same as FF.214E.) CMTSMS Official Student Count List By Current Cls…CMT Ref: FF.214E .01

Report for:

District:

School:

Run Date: 13004 (MMDDYY)

Exclude Tags: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___

Report Type: 1

1 = By Class

2 = By Homeroom

3 = By School/Student name

4 = By District/School/Student Name

5 = By District/Class/Student Name

6 = Total Page Only

Print Signature Lines after each report type or only on the bottom? B (R/B)

Single, Double, or Triple Space the detail lines on the report? 1 (1/2/3)

District: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS District Code you wish to run the program for. School: Enter the three (3) digit CIMS School Code if the program will be run for only a particular school. Run Date: The current date is the default, but may be changed to any date. Exclude Tags: Enter up to six (6) tags for those students you wish to exclude from this report. Report Type: Select the sorting format for the report. Report type six (6) will exclude all basic student information and provide totals only. Print Signature Lines: Enter ‘R’ to print signature lines after each report break. Enter ‘B’ to have the signature lines print at the bottom of the report. Single, Double, or Triple Space: Enter 1, 2 or 3 to specify the report spacing.

Page 141: An Employee Owned Company - cmtonline.com · R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 1 General Information Forward

R:\CMT\Manuals\BROCHURE\MIRPT\MSDS\Fall 2012-2013\MSDS_Fall_2012_2013_Adminmnlv809_Rvsd17Sept2012bh.Docx 137

Appendix I – MSDS File Layouts (work in progress)